EMC Corporation Corporate Headquarters:
Hopkinton, MA 01748-9103
1-508-435-1000 www.EMC.com
EMC® VoyenceControlDevice Services Support (DSr)
Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6
Support MatrixP/N 300-010-546
REV A01
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix2
Copyright © 2010 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved.
Published February, 2010
EMC believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information is subject to change without notice.
THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” EMC CORPORATION MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Use, copying, and distribution of any EMC software described in this publication requires an applicable software license.
For the most up-to-date regulatory document for your product line, go to the Technical Documentation and Advisories section on EMC Powerlink.
For the most up-to-date listing of EMC product names, see EMC Corporation Trademarks on EMC.com.
All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface
IntroductionOverview................................................................................................................... 26
What is VoyenceControl? ................................................................................ 26Compatibility .................................................................................................... 26
Device Driver InformationNew device drivers.................................................................................................. 28Modified device drivers.......................................................................................... 29Enabling inactive device classes ............................................................................ 30Viewing installed device driver packages............................................................ 31Configuring FTP Transfer Service ......................................................................... 32
3COM Devices3Com Netbuilder II Router..................................................................................... 34
Features available ............................................................................................. 34Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 34Configuration capture...................................................................................... 34Configuration deploy....................................................................................... 35Multi-config files............................................................................................... 35Device data ........................................................................................................ 35
3Com Switch 5500.................................................................................................... 36Features available ............................................................................................. 36Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 36Configuration capture...................................................................................... 36Configuration deploy....................................................................................... 37Device commands ............................................................................................ 37Multi-config files............................................................................................... 38Device data ........................................................................................................ 38Known issues .................................................................................................... 38
ACME DevicesACME NetNet SBC.................................................................................................. 42
Features available ............................................................................................. 42Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 42Configuration capture...................................................................................... 43
Contents 3
Contents
Configuration deploy ....................................................................................... 43Multi-config files ............................................................................................... 43Device data......................................................................................................... 43Known issues..................................................................................................... 45
Adtran DevicesAdtran NetVanta ...................................................................................................... 48
Features available.............................................................................................. 48Discovery/identify methods........................................................................... 48Configuration capture ...................................................................................... 49Multi-config files ............................................................................................... 49Device data......................................................................................................... 49Known issues..................................................................................................... 50
Adtran NetVanta Switch ......................................................................................... 51Features available.............................................................................................. 51Discovery/identify methods........................................................................... 51Configuration capture ...................................................................................... 52Multi-config files ............................................................................................... 52Device data......................................................................................................... 53Known issues..................................................................................................... 53
Adva DevicesAdva FSP150CC ....................................................................................................... 56
Features available.............................................................................................. 56Discovery/identify methods........................................................................... 56Configuration capture ...................................................................................... 57Configuration deploy ....................................................................................... 57Multi-config files ............................................................................................... 57Device data......................................................................................................... 58Known issues..................................................................................................... 58
Airespace DevicesAirespace Switch ...................................................................................................... 60
Features available.............................................................................................. 60Discovery/identify methods........................................................................... 60Configuration capture ...................................................................................... 61Configuration deploy ....................................................................................... 61Multi-config files ............................................................................................... 61Device data......................................................................................................... 61Known issues..................................................................................................... 62
Alcatel DevicesAlcatel OmniAccess ................................................................................................. 64
Features available.............................................................................................. 64Discovery/identify methods........................................................................... 64Configuration capture ...................................................................................... 65Configuration deploy ....................................................................................... 65Multi-config files ............................................................................................... 65Device data......................................................................................................... 66Known issues..................................................................................................... 66
Alcatel OmniCore..................................................................................................... 68Features available.............................................................................................. 68
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix4
Contents
Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 68Configuration capture...................................................................................... 69Configuration deploy....................................................................................... 69Multi-config files............................................................................................... 69Device data ........................................................................................................ 69
Alcatel Omnistack.................................................................................................... 71Features available ............................................................................................. 71Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 71Configuration capture...................................................................................... 72Configuration deploy....................................................................................... 72Device commands ............................................................................................ 72Multi-config files............................................................................................... 73Device data ........................................................................................................ 73Known issues .................................................................................................... 74
Alcatel Omniswitch ................................................................................................. 75Features available ............................................................................................. 75Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 76Configuration capture...................................................................................... 76Configuration deploy....................................................................................... 76Additional Driver Functionality..................................................................... 76Device commands ............................................................................................ 77Multi-config files............................................................................................... 79Device data ........................................................................................................ 79Known issues .................................................................................................... 80
Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch .......................................... 81Features available ............................................................................................. 81Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 81Configuration capture...................................................................................... 82Configuration deploy....................................................................................... 82Configuration activations................................................................................ 82Multi-config files............................................................................................... 82Device data ........................................................................................................ 83Known issues .................................................................................................... 84
Alvarion DevicesAlvarion Breeze AP ................................................................................................. 86
Features available ............................................................................................. 86Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 86Configuration capture...................................................................................... 86Device commands ............................................................................................ 87Multi-config files............................................................................................... 87Device data ........................................................................................................ 87Known issues .................................................................................................... 88
Aruba DevicesAruba Wireless Switch ............................................................................................ 90
Features available ............................................................................................. 90Discovery/identify methods .......................................................................... 90Configuration capture...................................................................................... 90Configuration deploy....................................................................................... 91Multi-config files............................................................................................... 91Device data ........................................................................................................ 92
Contents 5
Contents
AudioCodes DevicesAudioCodes MediaPack.......................................................................................... 94
Features available.............................................................................................. 94Discovery/identify methods........................................................................... 94Configuration capture ...................................................................................... 95Configuration deploy ....................................................................................... 95Multi-config files ............................................................................................... 95Device data......................................................................................................... 95Known issues..................................................................................................... 97
BlueCoat DevicesBlueCoat SG ............................................................................................................ 100
Features available............................................................................................ 100Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 100Configuration capture .................................................................................... 101Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 101Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 101Device data....................................................................................................... 101Known issues................................................................................................... 102
Brocade DevicesBrocade 7500 ........................................................................................................... 104
Features available............................................................................................ 104Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 104Configuration capture .................................................................................... 104Device commands........................................................................................... 105Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 105Device data....................................................................................................... 105Known issues................................................................................................... 106
Brocade McData ..................................................................................................... 107Features available............................................................................................ 107Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 107Configuration capture .................................................................................... 108Device commands........................................................................................... 108Known issues................................................................................................... 108
Checkpoint DevicesCheckpoint Firewall-1 ........................................................................................... 110
Features available............................................................................................ 110Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 110Configuration capture .................................................................................... 111Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 111Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 111Device data....................................................................................................... 113Known issues................................................................................................... 113
Ciena DevicesCiena Router ........................................................................................................... 116
Features available............................................................................................ 116Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 116Configuration capture .................................................................................... 117
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix6
Contents
Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 117Multi-config files............................................................................................. 117Device data ...................................................................................................... 117Known issues .................................................................................................. 118
Cisco DevicesCisco Aironet AP VXWorks.................................................................................. 120
Features available ........................................................................................... 120Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 120Configuration capture.................................................................................... 120Multi-config files............................................................................................. 121Device data ...................................................................................................... 121
Cisco PIX Firewall.................................................................................................. 122Features available ........................................................................................... 122Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 123Configuration capture.................................................................................... 123Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 123Device commands .......................................................................................... 123Multi-config files............................................................................................. 125Device data ...................................................................................................... 125Known issues .................................................................................................. 126
Cisco VPN 3000 ...................................................................................................... 128Features available ........................................................................................... 128Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 128Configuration capture.................................................................................... 129Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 129Multi-config files............................................................................................. 129Device data ...................................................................................................... 129Known issues .................................................................................................. 130
Cisco Aironet AP Package .................................................................................... 131Features available ........................................................................................... 131Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 131Configuration capture.................................................................................... 132Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 132Multi-config files............................................................................................. 133Device data ...................................................................................................... 133Known issues .................................................................................................. 134
Cisco Aironet Bridge Package.............................................................................. 135Features available ........................................................................................... 135Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 135Configuration capture.................................................................................... 136Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 136Multi-config files............................................................................................. 136Device data ...................................................................................................... 137
Cisco Application Control Engine....................................................................... 138Features available ........................................................................................... 138Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 138Configuration capture.................................................................................... 139Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 139Multi-config files............................................................................................. 139Device data ...................................................................................................... 139Known issues .................................................................................................. 140
Cisco BPX ................................................................................................................ 141Features available ........................................................................................... 141
Contents 7
Contents
Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 141Configuration capture .................................................................................... 142Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 143Device commands........................................................................................... 143Known issues................................................................................................... 144
Cisco CatOS Switch Package ................................................................................ 145Features available............................................................................................ 146Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 146Configuration capture .................................................................................... 146Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 147Device commands........................................................................................... 147Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 149Device data....................................................................................................... 150Known issues................................................................................................... 150
Cisco Content Appliance....................................................................................... 152Features available............................................................................................ 152Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 153Configuration capture .................................................................................... 153Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 153Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 153Device data....................................................................................................... 155Known issues................................................................................................... 155
Cisco Content Services Switch ............................................................................. 156Features available............................................................................................ 156Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 156Configuration capture .................................................................................... 157Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 157Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 157Device data....................................................................................................... 158
Cisco Router ............................................................................................................ 159Features available............................................................................................ 160Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 160Configuration capture .................................................................................... 161Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 161Device commands........................................................................................... 162Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 164Device data....................................................................................................... 164Known issues................................................................................................... 165
Cisco IOS Switch Package..................................................................................... 167Features available............................................................................................ 168Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 168Configuration capture .................................................................................... 168Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 169Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 171Device data....................................................................................................... 172Known issues................................................................................................... 172
Cisco IOS XR ........................................................................................................... 174Features available............................................................................................ 174Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 174Configuration capture .................................................................................... 175Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 175Operating System Management ................................................................... 175Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 175Device data....................................................................................................... 176Known issues................................................................................................... 176
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix8
Contents
Cisco Intrusion Prevention System (IPS)............................................................ 178Features available ........................................................................................... 178Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 178Configuration capture.................................................................................... 179Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 179Multi-config files............................................................................................. 179Device data ...................................................................................................... 179Known issues .................................................................................................. 180
Cisco Lightstream Package................................................................................... 181Features available ........................................................................................... 181Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 181Configuration capture.................................................................................... 182Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 182Multi-config files............................................................................................. 182Device data ...................................................................................................... 183
Cisco Nexus ............................................................................................................ 184Features available ........................................................................................... 184Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 184Configuration capture.................................................................................... 185Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 185Device commands .......................................................................................... 185Multi-config files............................................................................................. 186Device data ...................................................................................................... 187Known issues .................................................................................................. 188
Cisco MGX .............................................................................................................. 189Features available ........................................................................................... 189Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 189Configuration capture.................................................................................... 190Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 190Device commands .......................................................................................... 191Known issues .................................................................................................. 192
Cisco MDS............................................................................................................... 194Features available ........................................................................................... 194Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 194Configuration capture.................................................................................... 195Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 195Device commands .......................................................................................... 195Multi-config files............................................................................................. 196Device data ...................................................................................................... 196Known Issues .................................................................................................. 196
Cisco Wide Area Application Services (WAAS)................................................ 197Features available ........................................................................................... 197Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 198Configuration capture.................................................................................... 198Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 198Multi-config files............................................................................................. 199Device data ...................................................................................................... 199
Cisco Wireless LAN Controller............................................................................ 200Features available ........................................................................................... 200Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 200Configuration capture.................................................................................... 201Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 201Multi-config files............................................................................................. 201Device data ...................................................................................................... 201Known issues .................................................................................................. 202
Contents 9
Contents
Citrix DevicesCitrix Netscaler LoadBalancer.............................................................................. 204
Features available............................................................................................ 204Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 204Configuration capture .................................................................................... 205Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 205Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 205Device data....................................................................................................... 205
D-Link DevicesD-Link xStack.......................................................................................................... 208
Features available............................................................................................ 208Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 208Configuration capture .................................................................................... 208Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 209Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 209Device data....................................................................................................... 209Known issues................................................................................................... 210
Edgewater DevicesEdgewater EdgeMarc Router ............................................................................... 212
Features available............................................................................................ 212Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 212Configuration capture .................................................................................... 213Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 213Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 213Device data....................................................................................................... 213
Enterasys DevicesEnterasys Smartswitch Router ............................................................................. 216
Features available............................................................................................ 216Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 216Configuration capture .................................................................................... 217Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 217Device commands........................................................................................... 217Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 218Device data....................................................................................................... 218Known issues................................................................................................... 219
Ericsson DevicesEricsson ECN Switch ............................................................................................. 222
Features available............................................................................................ 222Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 222Configuration capture .................................................................................... 222Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 223Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 223Device data....................................................................................................... 223Known issues................................................................................................... 224
Ericsson MSED ....................................................................................................... 225Features available............................................................................................ 225Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 225
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix10
Contents
Configuration capture.................................................................................... 226Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 226Multi-config files............................................................................................. 226Device data ...................................................................................................... 226
Extreme DevicesExtreme.................................................................................................................... 230
Features available ........................................................................................... 230Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 231Multi-config files............................................................................................. 231Device data ...................................................................................................... 231Known issues .................................................................................................. 232
ExtremeWare XOS.................................................................................................. 233Features available ........................................................................................... 233Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 233Configuration capture.................................................................................... 233Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 234Multi-config files............................................................................................. 234Device data ...................................................................................................... 234Known issues .................................................................................................. 235
F5 DevicesF5 Load Balancer Rev 3......................................................................................... 238
Features available ........................................................................................... 238Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 238Configuration capture.................................................................................... 239Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 239Device commands .......................................................................................... 239Multi-config files............................................................................................. 240Device data ...................................................................................................... 241
F5 Load Balancer Rev 4......................................................................................... 242Features available ........................................................................................... 242Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 242Configuration capture.................................................................................... 242Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 243Multi-config files............................................................................................. 243Device data ...................................................................................................... 244
F5 Load Balancer Rev 9......................................................................................... 245Features available ........................................................................................... 245Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 246Configuration capture.................................................................................... 246Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 246Device commands .......................................................................................... 246Multi-config files............................................................................................. 247Device data ...................................................................................................... 249
Force10 DevicesForce10 C-Series Router ........................................................................................ 252
Features available ........................................................................................... 252Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 252Configuration capture.................................................................................... 253Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 253Multi-config files............................................................................................. 253
Contents 11
Contents
Device data....................................................................................................... 253Force10 E-Series Router......................................................................................... 255
Features available............................................................................................ 255Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 255Configuration capture .................................................................................... 256Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 256Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 256Device data....................................................................................................... 256
Force10 S-Series Router ......................................................................................... 258Features available............................................................................................ 258Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 258Configuration capture .................................................................................... 259Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 259Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 259Device data....................................................................................................... 260
Fortinet DevicesFortinet Fortigate Router....................................................................................... 262
Features available............................................................................................ 262Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 262Configuration capture .................................................................................... 263Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 263Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 263Device data....................................................................................................... 264Known issues................................................................................................... 264
Foundry DevicesFoundry EdgeIron.................................................................................................. 266
Features available............................................................................................ 266Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 266Configuration capture .................................................................................... 267Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 267Device data....................................................................................................... 267Known issues................................................................................................... 268
Foundry Package.................................................................................................... 269Features available............................................................................................ 269Discovery/identify device............................................................................. 269Configuration capture .................................................................................... 270Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 270Device commands........................................................................................... 270Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 271Device data....................................................................................................... 271
Gigamon DevicesGigamon Switch ..................................................................................................... 274
Features available............................................................................................ 274Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 274Configuration capture .................................................................................... 275Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 275Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 276Device data....................................................................................................... 276Known issues................................................................................................... 277
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix12
Contents
HP DevicesHP ProCurve Switch ............................................................................................. 280
Features available ........................................................................................... 281Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 281Configuration capture.................................................................................... 281Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 281Device commands .......................................................................................... 281Multi-config files............................................................................................. 282Device data ...................................................................................................... 282Known issues .................................................................................................. 283
HUAWEI DevicesSmartAX .................................................................................................................. 286
Features available ........................................................................................... 286Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 286Configuration capture.................................................................................... 287Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 287Device commands .......................................................................................... 287Multi-config files............................................................................................. 288Device data ...................................................................................................... 288Known issues .................................................................................................. 289
Intermec DevicesIntermec MobileLAN ............................................................................................ 292
Features available ........................................................................................... 292Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 292Configuration capture.................................................................................... 293Multi-config files............................................................................................. 293Device data ...................................................................................................... 293Known issues .................................................................................................. 294
Juniper DevicesJuniper ERX (E Series) ........................................................................................... 296
Features available ........................................................................................... 296Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 297Configuration capture.................................................................................... 297Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 298Operating System Management................................................................... 298Multi-config files............................................................................................. 299Device data ...................................................................................................... 299Known issues .................................................................................................. 299
Juniper Router ........................................................................................................ 300Features available ........................................................................................... 300Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 301Configuration capture.................................................................................... 301Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 301Multi-config files............................................................................................. 302Device data ...................................................................................................... 302Known issues .................................................................................................. 303
Juniper Switch (EX Series) .................................................................................... 304Features available ........................................................................................... 304Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 305
Contents 13
Contents
Configuration capture .................................................................................... 305Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 305Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 306Device data....................................................................................................... 306Known issues................................................................................................... 307
Juniper EX2500 Switch .......................................................................................... 308Features available............................................................................................ 308Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 309Configuration capture .................................................................................... 309Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 309Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 309Device data....................................................................................................... 310Known issues................................................................................................... 311
Laurel DevicesLaurel ST Router..................................................................................................... 314
Features available............................................................................................ 314Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 314Configuration capture .................................................................................... 315Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 315Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 315Device data....................................................................................................... 315Known issues................................................................................................... 316
Lucent DevicesLucent Access Point ............................................................................................... 318
Features available............................................................................................ 318Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 318Configuration capture .................................................................................... 318Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 319Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 319Device data....................................................................................................... 319
Marconi DevicesMarconi ASX ........................................................................................................... 322
Features available............................................................................................ 322Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 322Configuration capture .................................................................................... 323Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 323Device commands........................................................................................... 323Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 323Device data....................................................................................................... 324Known issues................................................................................................... 324
McAfee DevicesMcAfee IntruShield................................................................................................ 326
Features available............................................................................................ 326Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 326Configuration capture .................................................................................... 326Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 327Device data....................................................................................................... 327Known issues................................................................................................... 328
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix14
Contents
Milan DevicesSM801P Managed Switch ..................................................................................... 330
Features available ........................................................................................... 330Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 330Multi-config files............................................................................................. 331Device data ...................................................................................................... 331
Motorola BSRMotorola BSR Router............................................................................................. 334
Features available ........................................................................................... 334Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 334Configuration capture.................................................................................... 335Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 335Device commands .......................................................................................... 335Multi-config files............................................................................................. 336Device data ...................................................................................................... 336
MRV DevicesMRV LX Terminal Server ...................................................................................... 340
Features available ........................................................................................... 340Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 340Configuration capture.................................................................................... 341Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 341Multi-config files............................................................................................. 341Device data ...................................................................................................... 341
NetCache DevicesNetCache................................................................................................................. 344
Features available ........................................................................................... 344Multi-config files............................................................................................. 344Device data ...................................................................................................... 345
Netopia DevicesNetopia R7000 Series ............................................................................................. 348
Features available ........................................................................................... 348Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 348Configuration capture.................................................................................... 348Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 349Multi-config files............................................................................................. 349Device data ...................................................................................................... 349
NetScreen DevicesNetScreen Firewall................................................................................................. 352
Features available ........................................................................................... 352Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 353Configuration capture.................................................................................... 353Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 353Multi-config files............................................................................................. 353Device data ...................................................................................................... 353Known issues .................................................................................................. 354
Contents 15
Contents
Nokia DevicesNokia IP ................................................................................................................... 356
Features available............................................................................................ 356Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 357Configuration capture .................................................................................... 357Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 357Device commands........................................................................................... 357Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 358Device data....................................................................................................... 359
Nortel DevicesNortel Alteon .......................................................................................................... 362
Features available............................................................................................ 362Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 362Configuration capture .................................................................................... 363Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 363Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 363Device data....................................................................................................... 363Known issues................................................................................................... 364
Nortel Alteon 2400 ................................................................................................. 365Features available............................................................................................ 365Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 365Configuration capture .................................................................................... 365Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 366Known issues................................................................................................... 366
Nortel Router .......................................................................................................... 367Features available............................................................................................ 367Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 367Configuration capture .................................................................................... 368Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 368Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 368Device data....................................................................................................... 368Known issues................................................................................................... 369
Nortel Baystack....................................................................................................... 370Features available............................................................................................ 370Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 370Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 371Device data....................................................................................................... 371
Nortel BoSS Switch ................................................................................................ 372Features available............................................................................................ 372Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 372Configuration capture .................................................................................... 373Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 373Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 373Device data....................................................................................................... 373
Nortel Contivity ..................................................................................................... 375Features available............................................................................................ 375Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 375Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 376Device data....................................................................................................... 376
Nortel Multi-Service Switch ................................................................................. 377Features available............................................................................................ 377Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 378Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 378
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix16
Contents
Device data ...................................................................................................... 378Known issues .................................................................................................. 379
Nortel Passport....................................................................................................... 380Features available ........................................................................................... 380Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 380Configuration capture.................................................................................... 380Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 381Multi-config files............................................................................................. 381Device data ...................................................................................................... 381
Nortel Passport 8600.............................................................................................. 382Features available ........................................................................................... 382Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 383Configuration capture.................................................................................... 383Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 383Multi-config files............................................................................................. 383Device data ...................................................................................................... 383Known issues .................................................................................................. 384
Nortel 4500 Switch................................................................................................. 385Features available ........................................................................................... 385Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 386Configuration capture.................................................................................... 386Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 386Device commands .......................................................................................... 387Multi-config files............................................................................................. 387Device data ...................................................................................................... 387Known issues .................................................................................................. 388
Overture DevicesOverture NC ........................................................................................................... 390
Features available ........................................................................................... 390Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 390Configuration capture.................................................................................... 391Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 391Device commands .......................................................................................... 391Device data ...................................................................................................... 391Known issues .................................................................................................. 392
Overture NG........................................................................................................... 393Features available ........................................................................................... 393Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 394Configuration capture.................................................................................... 394Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 394Operating System Management................................................................... 394Device data ...................................................................................................... 395Known issues .................................................................................................. 395
Overture NP ........................................................................................................... 396Features available ........................................................................................... 396Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 396Configuration capture.................................................................................... 397Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 397Device commands .......................................................................................... 397Multi-config files............................................................................................. 398Device data ...................................................................................................... 398Known issues .................................................................................................. 399
Contents 17
Contents
Packeteer DevicesPacketeer PacketShaper......................................................................................... 402
Features available............................................................................................ 402Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 403Configuration capture .................................................................................... 403Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 403Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 404Device data....................................................................................................... 404
Paradyne DevicesParadyne 9100......................................................................................................... 406
Features available............................................................................................ 406Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 406Device commands........................................................................................... 406Known issues................................................................................................... 407
Patton DevicesSmartNode Router ................................................................................................. 410
Features available............................................................................................ 410Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 411Configuration capture .................................................................................... 411Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 411Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 412Device data....................................................................................................... 412
Radware DevicesRadware WSD Load Balancer .............................................................................. 414
Features available............................................................................................ 414Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 414Configuration capture .................................................................................... 415Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 415Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 415Device data....................................................................................................... 415
Riverbed DevicesRiverbed Steelhead ................................................................................................ 418
Features available............................................................................................ 418Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 418Configuration capture .................................................................................... 419Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 419Device commands........................................................................................... 419Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 420Device data....................................................................................................... 420Known issues................................................................................................... 421
Riverstone DevicesRiverstone Router................................................................................................... 424
Features available............................................................................................ 424Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 424Configuration capture .................................................................................... 424
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix18
Contents
Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 425Config files....................................................................................................... 425Device data ...................................................................................................... 425
Siemens DevicesSiemens.................................................................................................................... 428
Features available ........................................................................................... 428Multi-config files............................................................................................. 429Device data ...................................................................................................... 429
Siemens hiX56xx DSLAM..................................................................................... 430Features available ........................................................................................... 430Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 430Configuration capture.................................................................................... 431Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 431Multi-config files............................................................................................. 431Device data ...................................................................................................... 432Known issues .................................................................................................. 432
SourceFire DevicesSourcefire 3D Sensor.............................................................................................. 436
Features available ........................................................................................... 436Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 436Configuration capture.................................................................................... 437Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 437Device data ...................................................................................................... 437Known issues .................................................................................................. 438
Starent DevicesStarent PDSN.......................................................................................................... 440
Features available ........................................................................................... 440Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 440Configuration capture.................................................................................... 441Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 441Multi-config files............................................................................................. 441Device data ...................................................................................................... 441Known issues .................................................................................................. 442
Symbol DevicesSymbol WS-2000 .................................................................................................... 444
Features available ........................................................................................... 444Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 445Configuration capture.................................................................................... 445Configuration deploy..................................................................................... 446Operating System Management notes ........................................................ 446Multi-config files............................................................................................. 447Device data ...................................................................................................... 447
Tasman DevicesTasman Router........................................................................................................ 450
Features available ........................................................................................... 450Discovery/identify methods ........................................................................ 450
Contents 19
Contents
Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 451Device data....................................................................................................... 451Known issues................................................................................................... 451
Telco DevicesTelco Switch............................................................................................................. 454
Features available............................................................................................ 454Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 454Configuration capture .................................................................................... 455Configuration Deploy .................................................................................... 455Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 455Device data....................................................................................................... 455Known issues................................................................................................... 456
Telco T-Metro .......................................................................................................... 457Features available............................................................................................ 457Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 457Configuration capture .................................................................................... 458Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 458Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 458Device data....................................................................................................... 458Known issues................................................................................................... 459
Vanguard DevicesVanguard Router .................................................................................................... 462
Features available............................................................................................ 462Discovery/identify methods......................................................................... 462Configuration capture .................................................................................... 462Configuration deploy ..................................................................................... 463Multi-config files ............................................................................................. 463Device data....................................................................................................... 463Known issues................................................................................................... 464
Index
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix20
Preface
. As part of an effort to improve and enhance the performance and capabilities of its product lines, EMC periodically releases revisions of its hardware and software. Therefore, some functions described in this document may not be supported by all versions of the software or hardware currently in use. For the most up-to-date information about product features, refer to your product release notes.
If a product does not function properly or does not function as described in this document, please contact your EMC representative.
Audience This document is part of the EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support (DSr) documentation set, and is intended for use by individuals who have the responsibility of installing and deploying devices and device drivers.
Readers of this document are expected to be familiar with the following topics:
◆ Windows®, Solaris, and Linux® operating systems
◆ Database architecture and concepts
◆ Security management
◆ Internet protocols, including HTTP, TCP/IP, File Transfer Protocol (FTP), and Telnet
◆ Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) and directory services
◆ Authentication and authorization
Related documentation
Related documents include:
◆ EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support (DSr) 12.0.0 Hotfix 4 - Patch Read Me
◆ EMC VoyenceControl Device Server 12.0.0 - Configuration Guide
Conventions used in this document
EMC uses the following conventions for special notices.
Note: A note presents information that is important, but not hazard-related.
CAUTION!A caution contains information essential to avoid data loss or damage to the system or equipment.
Preface 21
Preface
IMPORTANT!An important notice contains information essential to software or hardware operation.
WARNING
A warning contains information essential to avoid a hazard that can cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if you ignore the warning.
DANGER
A danger notice contains information essential to avoid a hazard that will cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if you ignore the message.
Typographical conventionsEMC uses the following type style conventions in this document:
Normal• Names of interface elements (such as names of windows, dialog boxes, buttons,
fields, and menus)• Names of resources, attributes, pools, Boolean expressions, buttons, DQL
statements, keywords, clauses, environment variables, functions, utilities• URLs, pathnames, filenames, directory names, computer names, filenames, links,
groups, service keys, file systems, notifications
Bold• Names of commands, daemons, options, programs, processes, services,
applications, utilities, kernels, notifications, system calls, man pages
• Names of interface elements (such as names of windows, dialog boxes, buttons, fields, and menus)
• What user specifically selects, clicks, presses, or types
Italic• Full titles of publications referenced in text• Emphasis (for example a new term)• Variables
Courier
• System output, such as an error message or script • URLs, complete paths, filenames, prompts, and syntax when shown outside of
running text
Courier bold
• Specific user input (such as commands)
Courier italic
• Variables on command line• User input variables
< >
[ ]
|
{ }
...
Used in running (nonprocedural) text for:
Used in running (nonprocedural) text for:
Used in procedures for:
Used in all text (including procedures) for:
Used for:
Used for:
Used in procedures for:
Angle brackets enclose parameter or variable values supplied by the user
Square brackets enclose optional values
Vertical bar indicates alternate selections - the bar means “or”
Braces indicate content that you must specify (that is, x or y or z)
Ellipses indicate nonessential information omitted from the example
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix22
Preface
Where to get help EMC support, product, and licensing information can be obtained as follows.
Product information — For documentation, release notes, software updates, or for information about EMC products, licensing, and service, go to the EMC Powerlink website (registration required) at:
http://Powerlink.EMC.com
Technical support — For technical support, go to Powerlink and choose Support. On the Support page, you will see several options, including one for making a service request. Note that to open a service request, you must have a valid support agreement. Please contact your EMC sales representative for details about obtaining a valid support agreement or with questions about your account.
Your comments Your suggestions will help us continue to improve the accuracy, organization, and overall quality of the user publications. Please send your opinion of this document to:
If you have issues, comments, or questions about specific information or procedures, please include the title and, if available, the part number, the revision (for example, A01), the page numbers, and any other details that will help us locate the subject you are addressing.
23
Preface
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix24
1
Introduction
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Overview ........................................................................................................................ 26
Introduction 25
Introduction
OverviewThe following information is included in this Support Matrix document.
◆ Device Driver Features and Information
◆ Additions to Existing Device Drivers
◆ Known Device Driver Issues
◆ Additional Device Driver Support Information
What is VoyenceControl?◆ An automated compliance, change and configuration management solution that
delivers industry-recognized best practices.
◆ A collaborative network infrastructure design, controlled change processes, network device and service configuration transparency, and compliance with corporate and regulatory requirements—to enable you to ensure the security, availability, and operational efficiency of your network.
◆ An automated support for all facets of the network infrastructure lifecycle, seamlessly integrating critical design, change, and compliance management requirements.
Compatibility
This release is certified to work with VoyenceControl 4.1.0 Hotfix 3, on the following environments:
◆ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 and 5
◆ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1
◆ Solaris 10
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix26
2
Device Driver Information
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ New device drivers ....................................................................................................... 28◆ Modified device drivers ............................................................................................... 29◆ Enabling inactive device classes ................................................................................. 30◆ Viewing installed device driver packages ................................................................. 31◆ Configuring FTP Transfer Service............................................................................... 32
Device Driver Information 27
Device Driver Information
New device drivers The following are new device drivers included with this release:
◆ Alcatel OmniAccess
• New Models: Alcatel OmniAccess 4324
• New Operating Systems: AOS-W 3.4, AOS-W 3.3.2.10
◆ Cisco Wide Area Application Services (WAAS)
• New Models: 512, 612, 674, 7371
• New Operating Systems: 4.8.0-12
◆ Intermec
• New Models: WA21, WA22
• New Operating Systems: 2.30
◆ Juniper EX2500 Switch
• New Models: EX2500
• New Operating Systems: EX2500 OS v3.0+
◆ Sourcefire 3D Sensor
• New Models: 3D Sensor 2100
• New Operating Systems: 4.8.0-12
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix28
Device Driver Information
Modified device driversThe following are device drivers that have been updated with this release
◆ Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch
• New Operating Systems: TiMOS-6.1.R9
◆ Cisco Content Appliance
• New Models: 674, 7341
◆ Cisco Content Service Switch
◆ Cisco IOS Switch Package
• New Models: WS-C2960G-24TC-L
• New Operating Systems: 12.2(44)SE LAYER_2
◆ Cisco IOS XR
◆ Cisco Router
• New Models: ASR 1004
◆ Force10 E-Series Router
◆ Juniper Router
Modified device drivers 29
Device Driver Information
Enabling inactive device classesTo enable a device class that is not enabled by default, follow these steps.
Step Action
Note: Changes to device classes may affect the underlying Auto Discovery device classes' configuration.
1 Select Tools > System Administration from the VoyenceControl menu bar.
2 Select Global > Device Classes to open the Global Managed Device Classes window.
3 Click the Manage List button.
4 Highlight the Supported Device Class you want to enable, and click the Add button. Repeat this step for all device classes you are enabling.
5 Click Ok.
6 Click Apply.
7 Click Yes to confirm the changes.
8 Click Ok.
9 Click Close.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix30
Device Driver Information
Viewing installed device driver packagesTo view a list of installed device driver packages, follow these steps.
Step Action
Note: This command can be run on either the Application Server or the Device Server. The versiondb.pl tool reports information based on the server where it is run.
1 Log into the server as a user with administrator privileges.
2 Navigate to the [Product Home]/bin directory.
3 Run the perl versiondb.pl --query command.
Viewing installed device driver packages 31
Device Driver Information
Configuring FTP Transfer ServiceTo support FTP transfers for configuration management on some devices, an FTP service must be configured on the device server(s). Refer to the individual driver documentation to determine if this service must be configured for your device.
As a minimum, the following characteristics must be present; any additional security precautions are the responsibility of the end-user.
◆ An anonymous FTP user (typically user anonymous) must be enabled.
◆ The anonymous FTP user’s home directory must be set to $TFTPHOMEDIR/ftp, and cannot be world-writeable.
◆ The path $TFTPHOMEDIR/ftp/backup must exist and the backup directory must be world-writeable.
◆ The FTP user must be able to create subdirectories under $TFTPHOMEDIR/ftp/backup. This may require additional settings for the FTP service employed.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix32
3
3COM Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ 3Com Netbuilder II Router .......................................................................................... 34◆ 3Com Switch 5500 ......................................................................................................... 36
3COM Devices 33
3COM Devices
3Com Netbuilder II Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available ◆ Discover/Identify (SNMP)
◆ Configuration Capture (Pull running configs)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configlets, TERMlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Discovery Mechanism:
• Look for SW/NBII in sysDescr
• Look for 1.3.6.1.4.1.43.1.4.(2|11|12|22|23) in sysObjectID
◆ Operating System from sysDescr
◆ Model from lookup table based on sysObjectID
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Get the boot directory using the sf 4 command
◆ Get a list of files in the boot directory excluding the BOOT.??K file
Router
All Netbuilder II Models
http://support.3com.com/infodeli/tools/bridrout/u_guides/html/index.htm
No
Syslogs, SNMP Trap
running
ARP, Routes, Interfaces, Identity, System Properties
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
CLI, SNMP
SNMP
In-Band
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Ping
Model, OS
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix34
3COM Devices
• copy [FILENAME] [SERVERIPADDR]:[FILENAME]
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For each file backup above:
• copy [SERVERIPADDR]:[FILENAME] [FILENAME]
Multi-config files Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
3Com Netbuilder II Router 35
3COM Devices
3Com Switch 5500
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysDescription contains Switch 5500 (case-insensitive)
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ display current-configuration
◆ display saved-configuration
◆ display startup
◆ tftp deviceServerAddress put filename filename
Switch
5500
http://www.3com.com
No
Single ASCII
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command Line Interface
SNMP
In-band, SNMP
3.02
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View Arp, View Interfaces
Memory, Serial Number, OS Version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix36
3COM Devices
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ startup configuration can only be transferred using TFTP
◆ tftp deviceServerAddress get filename filename
Device commands
The following device command sets must be enabled to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
display current-configuration
display saved-configuration
display startup
tftp deviceServerAddress [ get | put | localFilename remoteFilename
copy sourceFilename destFilename
save filename
delete filename
ping ipAddress
tracert ipAddress
display ip interface
display ip routing-table
display arp
◆ Password Management
display password-control
local-user userName
level 2
service-type terminal telnet ssh
password [ simple | cipher ] password
quit
undo local-user oldUsername
super password [ simple | cipher ] newPrivPass
snmp-agent community [ read | write ] newString
undo snmp-agent community oldString
3Com Switch 5500 37
3COM Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issuesThe following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
3Com Switch 5500
◆ Editing comments generated by the device when capturing the configuration causes device warnings during push operations.
◆ Inconsistencies in command behavior for configuration and credential management appear in software version 3.01, but not later versions.
• Startup configurations are the only file types retrieved.
Running
Startup
Access Control Lists No
ARP Table No
CAM Table No
Device Identity Yes
File System Information No
Hardware Information Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLANs No
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix38
3COM Devices
• User credentials cannot be removed during password rolls, due to the session use count. The error message User access number not 0 is displayed. Manual removal of the user credentials is untested but might be successful.
3Com Switch 5500 39
3COM Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix40
4
ACME Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ ACME NetNet SBC ....................................................................................................... 42
ACME Devices 41
ACME Devices
ACME NetNet SBC
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap, Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, and Operating System version using SNMP or command line interface
◆ Memory using command line interface
◆ File Systems using command line interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or command line interface
Session Border Controller
4250
www.acmepacket.com
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Running, Startup, Text
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP and Telnet/FTP
Command Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
6.1
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Terminal
Ping, View ARP, View Routes, View Interfaces, Resync, Reboot
Hardware Inventory (SNMP Only), Memory, File Systems, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix42
ACME Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ From a command line interface session, the output of show running-config is captured as the text config.
◆ From a command line interface session, the command backup-config [filename] is issued. That file is then transferred from the SBC using FTP and stored in binary form as the startup config.
◆ From a command line interface session, the command backup-config [filename] running is issued. That file is then transferred from the SBC using FTP and stored in binary form as the runnning config.
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ The text config , as captured, cannot be pushed to the device. Configlets must use the text config for the destination.
◆ A stored startup or running config is pushed to the system by transferring it to the system using FTP and issuing the command-line interface command restore-backup-config [filename].
◆ After successfully pushing a config or configlet, the default action is to issue a save-config command followed by an activate-config command. Optionally, this can be changed at push time to save-config (without an activate-config) or save-config followed by a reboot activate command.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Running
Startup
Text
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
ACME NetNet SBC 43
ACME Devices
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix44
ACME Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
ACME NetNet SBC
◆ The ACME NetNet SBC driver is known not to work with pre-v6.1 systems, due to substantial differences in the way that configuration backups work.
◆ Models other than the 4250 may need to be manually added to the driver's models file, due to ACME Packet not supplying a comprehensive list of SNMP Model OIDs.
◆ Pushing configlets to these systems may be problematic due to the way ACME's configuration editing works. In order to edit many configuration items, such as SNMP communities, the user must select an existing item to edit, which this driver cannot do. If you have advance knowledge of the system's configuration you may be able to create a configlet that works, but VoyenceControl does not support the concept of selecting a configuration item to edit.
◆ Configlets always use the text config for the destination.
◆ A configlet is processed in the device's configuration mode. Ensure not to exit completely out of config mode, as this causes the job to fail.
◆ Selection prompts are considered valid config prompts. The following configlet is now valid:
system
snmp-community
sel
public
1
ip-addresses (1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2)
done
exit
exit
ACME NetNet SBC 45
ACME Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix46
5
Adtran Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Adtran NetVanta ........................................................................................................... 48◆ Adtran NetVanta Switch .............................................................................................. 51
Adtran Devices 47
Adtran Devices
Adtran NetVanta
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Operating System
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Quto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.664
Adtran NetVanta
NetVanta 3120, NetVanta 3200, NetVanta 3305, NetVanta 3205, NetVanta 5305, NetVanta 4305, Atlas 800, Atlas Generic, Atlas 800 Plus, Atlas 810, Atlas 550, Total Access 916e
-
04.02.00, 05.02.00, 05.03.00, 06.01.00
Yes
Single Text, Running, Startup
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet
Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
IOS like
SNMP, Telnet, SNMP
Enable, In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Hardware Inventory (Terminal Only)
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix48
Adtran Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet/TFTP
• copy startup-config tftp
• copy running-config tftp
◆ Telnet/SSH
• show startup
• show running
• copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed Data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
Adtran NetVanta 49
Adtran Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Adtran NetVanta drivers
◆ Adtran NetVanta and Adtran NetVanta Switch drivers may experience problems if configured with the message of the day banner.
Adtran NetVanta Router - Serial Numbers not Displaying
◆ The Adtran NetVanta Router does not show the serial number when using SNMP.
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed Data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix50
Adtran Devices
Adtran NetVanta Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Operating System
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.664
◆ adtranIfNumber
• .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0
• Should be greater than 4
Adtran NetVanta Switch
NetVanta 1224, NetVanta 1224R, NetVanta 1224 STR
-
06.01.03
Yes
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Configlet
Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
IOS like
SNMP
Enable, In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Software Version, Hardware Inventory
Adtran NetVanta Switch 51
Adtran Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet/TFTP
• copy startup-config tftp
• copy running-config tftp
◆ Telnet/SSH
• show startup
• show running
• copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
startup
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix52
Adtran Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Adtran NetVanta Switch drivers
◆ Adtran NetVanta and Adtran NetVanta Switch drivers may experience problems if configured with the message of the day banner.
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Adtran NetVanta Switch 53
Adtran Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix54
6
Adva Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Adva FSP150CC ............................................................................................................ 56
Adva Devices 55
Adva Devices
Adva FSP150CC
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Operating System
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations)
◆ Credential Roll
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
• Model, serial number, and operating system version using SNMP or command-line interface
• Interface table using SNMP or command-line interface
Switch
FSP150CC-825,FSP150CCD-410
http://www.advaoptical.com/
2.1, 7.0
No
Running, Startup
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, View Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix56
Adva Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Running configuration using SSH or Telnet:
• show running-config command is issued in the command-line interface, and the file captured directly from the command-line interface output.
◆ Startup configuration using SSH/FTP or Telnet/FTP:
• The command database backup is issued.
• The command database copy ftp put [serverip] [username] [password] [filename] is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the file to an FTP server running on the device server.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration from your device.
◆ Running configuration using SSH or Telnet:
• A command-line interface session is started in config mode. The config is entered line by line while monitoring responses for error messages.
• By default, the running config is copied to the startup by issuing the database save command. This can be disabled when the job is scheduled.
◆ Startup configuration using SSH/FTP or Telnet/FTP:
• The command database copy ftp get [serverip] [username] [password] [filename] is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the file from an FTP server running on the device server, to the device.
• The command database restore active none is issued.
• By default, the system is rebooted. This can be disabled when the job is scheduled.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
startup
Adva FSP150CC 57
Adva Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed Data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Adva FSP150CC
◆ This device can only transfer binary files using an external FTP server located on the device server. It is the customer’s responsibility to setup and maintain a correctly configured FTP daemon on the appropriate device server.
◆ The driver will default to using the FTP credentials: anonymous / [email protected]. The defaults can be changed on a device by device basis using the quick command named Set_FTP_Credentials.
◆ Some lines in the text (running) config cannot be sent back to the device using terminal input.
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix58
7
Airespace Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Airespace Switch ........................................................................................................... 60
Airespace Devices 59
Airespace Devices
Airespace Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.14179
◆ sysDescr, Switch
• Contains Airespace Switch
Wireless Switch
Airespace Switch AS-4101,AIR-WLC4404-100-K9,WS-SVC-WISM-1-K9
-
Yes
Binary Image
Binary
Telnet, TFTP, SSH
CLI
SNMP Only
Account, SNMP
2.0.152.3
Terminal/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal/TFTP, SSH/TFTP, Terminal
Terminal
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix60
Airespace Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ transfer upload
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Transfer download
◆ Terminal, one line at a time
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Airespace Switch 61
Airespace Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Airespace 4400
◆ Issue: Over time, a client Out of Memory message may be displayed when opening or searching Checkpoint Firewall or Airespace device configurations that contain large binary files.
◆ Resolution: If a client Out of Memory message is displayed, first close, and then re-open the application.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix62
8
Alcatel Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Alcatel OmniAccess ...................................................................................................... 64◆ Alcatel OmniCore.......................................................................................................... 68◆ Alcatel Omnistack ......................................................................................................... 71◆ Alcatel Omniswitch ...................................................................................................... 75◆ Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch................................................ 81
Alcatel Devices 63
Alcatel Devices
Alcatel OmniAccess
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appears in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets, Termlets)
◆ Credential Roll (Enable Password, SNMP Credentials, Account Password)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• Sys Object Id
– 1.3.6.1.4.1.6486.800.1.1.2.2.2.1.1.2◆ For Terminal:
• show version includes manufacturer and model information
• show running-config includes hostname information
Alcatel OmniAccess Switch
Alcatel OmniAccess 4324
http://enterprise.alcatel-lucent.com/
Yes
Startup, Running
Config, Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command
SNMP, SSH, Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
Enable, SNMP, Account
AOS-W 3.4, AOS-W 3.3.2.10
SSH, Telnet
SSH, Telnet
Terminal
Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic, Setup NAT, View NAT
Terminal
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix64
Alcatel Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Telnet or SSH:
• The configuration is pulled using the show running-config or show startup-config command.
◆ For Telnet/TFTP or SSH/TFTP:
• The configuration is pulled using the copy startup-config tftp and copy running-config tftp commands.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Push Running using Telnet, SSH:
• A command-line interface session is started in config mode.
• The configuration is pushed line by line while checking responses for error codes.
◆ Push Startup using Telnet/TFTP, or SSH/TFTP:
• A command-line interface session is started in config mode.
• The configuration is pushed via TFTP as a file using copy tftp and copy flash commands
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
startup
Alcatel OmniAccess 65
Alcatel Devices
Device data The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Alcatel OmniAccess
◆ The configuration information obtained from a running config pull cannot be pushed back to the device. The running config push is done on a line by line basis through the command-line interface in config mode,due to there being no way to push an entire config file to running.
◆ Some commands are not accepted and must be removed from the configuration before pushing a full configuration. A few examples of lines that must be removed are:
• version 3.3
• enable secret "******"
• end
◆ Some commands are not valid and should be removed or replaced with valid commands before pushing a full configuration. A few examples of lines that must be removed or replaced are:
• mms config 0
• controller config 0
• ip access-list eth validuserethacl
permit any
• ip access-list session validuser
any any any permit
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix66
Alcatel Devices
• vpn-dialer default-dialer
ike authentication PRE-SHARE ******
• user-role ap-role
• user-role denyall
session-acl denyall
• user-role cpbase
session-acl cpbase
• user-role guest-logon
• user-role guest
• user-role stateful-dot1x
• user-role logon
• aaa pubcookie-authentication
• no crypto isakmp psk-caching
• no crypto-local isakmp permit-invalid-cert
• crypto isakmp groupname changeme
• crypto-local isakmp dpd idle-timeout 22 retry-timeout 2 retry-attempts 3
• crypto-local isakmp xauth
• vpdn group l2tp
ppp authentication PAP
• vpdn group pptp
ppp authentication MSCHAPv2
• mgmt-user admin root 9bf216ef01dc8a58fdecefdd48e9482a5ef57ed326a34ffd75
• country US
◆ Some commands can only be pushed to the master switch and are not valid for a local switch. These commands are displayed in the configs pulled from the device, but must be removed from the configs before pushing. See the AOS-W User Guide for more information.
Alcatel OmniAccess 67
Alcatel Devices
Alcatel OmniCore
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.3.3003 or 1.3.6.1.4.1.3003
◆ sysDesc
• contains "Switch"
Alcatel Omnicore Routing Switch
OmniCore 5052, OmniCore 5022 OmniCore 5010, OmniCore 13 OmniSwitch 5, OmniSwitch 9, OmniCell 5, OmniCell 9, OmniStack 1024, OmniStack 6024, OmniStack 8008, OmniAccess 408, OmniAccess 512
-
Yes
Single Text
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix68
Alcatel Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Term
• write-config
◆ TFTP
• write-config tftp://"+SERVERIPADDR+"/"+tftpFile(configFile.filename)
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Copy to start
• write mem
◆ TFTP
• copy tftp:…
◆ Term
• Push is done by pushing one line at a time after connecting to a terminal session
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-Config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Alcatel OmniCore 69
Alcatel Devices
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix70
Alcatel Devices
Alcatel Omnistack
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Operating System Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Switch Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-band, SNMP)
◆ Operating System Management (OS Upgrade)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectId
• contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.6486.800.1.1.2.2.4.1
◆ Serial Number retrieved successfully from ENTITY-MIB for row with class chassis (3)
Switch
6624, 6246, 8008, LS6224U
http://service.esd.alcatel-lucent.com/
No
Single ASCII
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-band, SNMP
1.0.0.47, 1.7.0.13For LS6224U Models: 1.5.1.7
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Interfaces, View Arp
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, OS Version, Inventory
Alcatel Omnistack 71
Alcatel Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet, SSH:
• show running-config
• show startup-config
◆ Telnet, SSH with TFTP:
• copy running-config tftp
• copy startup-config tftp
Configuration deployThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Telnet, SSH:
• Commands are issued to the command line interface in Non-TFTP mode
◆ Telnet, SSH with TFTP:
• copy tftp running-config
• copy tftp startup-config
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
config
enable
disable
(no) terminal datadump
show running-config
show startup-config
ping
traceroute
show ip interface
show arp
◆ Password Management
(no) snmp-server community
(no) username
enable password level 15
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix72
Alcatel Devices
◆ OS Management
show bootvar
boot system name
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
startup
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Alcatel Omnistack 73
Alcatel Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Alcatel Omnistack
◆ Push-to-Start using Telnet/SSH not supported.
◆ No volatile memory support using SNMP or command line interface
• Blank values are displayed in the client.
◆ Image files are listed in the file system information. Image files cannot be selected and backed up by name due to a limitation of the device. The active image can be backed up as an upgrade option.
◆ Boot file upgrades are not supported.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix74
Alcatel Devices
Alcatel Omniswitch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Operating System
Configuration Files
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap)
◆ Credentials Management (Change or Roll passwords and SNMP Communities)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
◆ Dynamically Handled Sync (Stacked Devices)
Switch
6602-48, 6624, 6850, OS6850-P48, 7700,9700, OS9616/OS9716-CFM2
CD-ROM Copy
Yes
Operating systems for 6602-48 models: 5.1.6.243.R02 GA, 5.1.6.393.R01 GAOperating systems for 6850 models: 6.3.1.999.R01Operating systems for 7700 and 9700 models: 6.3.1.1023.R01Operating systems for other models: 5.1.5.83.R04, 6.3.4.378.R01 GA, 6.4.1.394.S01 GA
Single Text
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, SSH, Telnet
Account, SNMP
SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP
Terminal
View Interfaces, View Routes, View ARP, Ping, Traceroute
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Software Version, Inventory
Alcatel Omniswitch 75
Alcatel Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysObjectID value contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.6486.800.1.1.2.1
• Serial number is found in row (chassis class) of entPhysicalTable in ENTITY-MIB
◆ For Terminal:
• sysObjectID is present in show system output
• Value contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.6486.800.1.1.2.1
Configuration captureThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• show configuration snapshot
◆ For File Transfer:
• Configuration is pulled using FTP
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• Device commands are issued interactively from the stored configuration (configlet only); each command is sent line-by-line as long as the device returns to a prompt afterwards. The results are scanned for warnings and errors.
◆ For File Transfer:
• Configuration is pushed using FTP
Additional Driver Functionality
The Omniswitch driver now manages all three configurations for the device class (running/RAM, working/warm-boot, and certified/cold-boot).
The following post-operations are available based on the destination configuration for the push:
◆ running - the volatile configuration changed from the command line.
• Copy to Working
– Syncs the volatile and warm-boot configurations.◆ working - the non-volatile configuration in /flash/working/boot.cfg.
• Made active with “reload working no rollback-timeout”.
• Copy to Certified
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix76
Alcatel Devices
– Syncs the cold-boot from the warm-boot configuration.• Reboot from Working
– Boots from /flash/working/boot.cfg.– See the Known Issues for more information.
◆ certified - the non-volatile configuration in /flash/certified/boot.cfg.
• Made active with “reload”or a cold boot.
• Copy to Working
– Syncs the warm-boot from the cold-boot configuration.• Reboot
– Boots from /flash/certified/boot.cfg.
Resync InformationThe Resync menu command can alter both working and certified configurations. The Omniswitch provides no direct command to write from running to certified. If any configuration pairs are out-of-sync, the following scenarios apply:
◆ running and working out-of-sync:
• copy running working
– Changes the working configuration if successful• copy working certified
– May change the software version on the next cold start.– See the Known Issues for more information.
◆ running and working configurations in-sync, working and certified configurations out-of-sync:
• copy working certified
• Issued to change the certified configuration.
• May change the software version on the next cold start.
• See the Known Issues for more information.
Note: Unlike previous versions of the driver, it is possible for the running and working configurations to be different. In practice, copying to the certified configuration should only be done once operation of the working configuration is satisfactory, as it is the fallback provisioning for the device. The “Copy Working to Certified” and “Copy Certified to Working” post operations are not default choices in the user interface.
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
show system
show running-directory
no more
ping
reload working no rollback-timeout
show arp
Alcatel Omniswitch 77
Alcatel Devices
show chassis
show cmm
show configuration snapshot
show hardware info
show health
show interfaces
show ip interface
show ip protocols
show ip route
show module long
show running-directory
show system
traceroute
◆ File Management
cd
copy running-config working
copy working certified [flash-synchro]
copy certffied working
delete
freespace
ftp
hash
ls
◆ Password Management
[no] snmp community map
[no] user
password
show snmp community map
show user
show user password-size
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix78
Alcatel Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
working
certified
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Alcatel Omniswitch 79
Alcatel Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Alcatel Omniswitch
◆ Full configuration pushes for the working and certified files require FTP to be enabled. Configlets and the running configuration use terminal mode only.
◆ Cold booting the device will use the configuration stored in /flash/certified/boot.cfg unless it is identical to /flash/working/boot.cfg. If these files differ, the reload working no-rollback timeout command must be issued or configuration changes will fail. This can be done using cut-through.
◆ The Reboot from Working post-operation on configuration pushes does not warn the user about service interruption.
◆ Post operations on working and certified configurations may potentially change the operating system version of the device if it is rebooted afterwards. This is due to the use of “copy working certified” and “copy certified working” commands for these operations. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that configuration content is compatible if the software images in the working and certified directories differ.
◆ SNMP credential rolls are not written to the certified (startup) configuration, which is a device limitation in the copy command syntax (as detailed in the previous bullet). The commit operation used after account and SNMP rolls uses “copy running working” to avoid copying software images as part of SNMP credential changes.
◆ The model name is reported differently through SNMP than through terminal: SNMP uses the chassis entry of ENTITY-MIB, while the terminal query uses the “Model Name:” field in the “show system” response, which corresponds to the CMM model.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix80
Alcatel Devices
Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Credential Roll (In-Band, SNMP)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (TFTP)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number and Operating System version using SNMP or Command-Line Interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or Command-Line Interface
Alcatel SR Router
7450 ESS-1, 7450 ESS-6, 7450 ESS-7, 7450 ESS-12,7750 SR-1, 7750 SR-12
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com
No
Boot Options, Startup, Running
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
Account, SNMPv1/2
SR OS Release 5 (B-5.0.R8, C-5.0.R8), TiMOS-6.1.R9Untested: 7.0.R9
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Telnet, SSH
TFTPUntested: FTP
Traceroute
Identity, Serial Number, Software Version, Memory, Filesystem, Inventory
Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch 81
Alcatel Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet
• The admin display-config command is issued in the command line interface, and the file captured directly from the command line interface output.
◆ For SSH/FTP or Telnet/FTP
• The startup-config (config.cfg) or boot-options-file (bof.cg) is copied using FTP.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet
• The command configuration file contents are entered line-by-line directly into the CLI.
◆ For SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP
• The startup-config (config.cfg) or boot-options-file (bof.cfg) is copied to the device using FTP.
Configuration activationsFollowing are the commands or processes used to "activate" a configuration deployed to the device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet:
• These commands are immediately active on the device. The Save post operation allows for saving the running configuration to the startup (config.cfg) file using the admin save command.
◆ For SSH/FTP or Telnet/FTP
• Files are directly copied to the default destinations. For the config.cfg file the Load post operation loads the file using the exec command. For the bof.cfg file the Reboot post operation will reboot and restart the device thereby activating the boot-options-file.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Startup
Running
Boot-options-file
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix82
Alcatel Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed Data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch 83
Alcatel Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch
◆ The serial number can not be obtained using SNMP. A serial number of Unknown will be displayed if the correct account credentials are not supplied.
◆ A user cannot delete their own account due to device limititations.
◆ Any attempt to roll credentials to a new user account will leave the existing account in place. The account must be deleted using a configlet or cut-through to the device. Attempts to roll user names may result in a warning with the message: CLI Users cannot delete themselves. Old user name must be removed manually.
◆ OS upgrade:
• Standard upgrade is supported
• In-Service upgrade and AA Signature upgrades are not supported.
• Service Router upgrade capability is unverified.
• The operating system repository must use a path for the images, since the files themselves do not have versioning information in the names. The path must be only one level deep. Support for creating nested directories on the supported devices has not been implemented.
– It is advisable that the operating system version be used for the directory in which the images reside, since this is used for the device image directory and the primary-image boot option setting.
– If only one set of images is present in the repository, and no path is specified, the name SW_UPGRADE will be used.
• The upgrade fails in the scheduler if the following conditions are not present:
– The boot.ldr file must be part of the selected images.– For a one-slot chassis, the both.tim file must be included along with the boot
loader.– For a redundant SFM/CPM device, both CPM and IOM image files must
be included along with the boot loader.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix84
9
Alvarion Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Alvarion Breeze AP....................................................................................................... 86
Alvarion Devices 85
Alvarion Devices
Alvarion Breeze AP
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysName OID
◆ sysServices: bit 3 set
◆ brzAccUnitType (from Breeze-Access-MIB)
Configuration captureThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Main > Info > Advanced Configuration
Wireless Access Point
BreezeACCESS SU-A/E-BD
http://www.alvarion.com
No
ASCII Capture (no push)
Config
Telnet
Menu
SNMP
In-band
4.5.17
Telnet
Terminal
Test Credentials
Chassis inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix86
Alvarion Devices
Device commands
The following device menus must be enabled to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
Advanced Configuration
◆ Password Management
Unit Control
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
Access Control Lists No
ARP Table No
CAM Table No
Device Identity Yes
File System Information No
Hardware Information No
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLANs No
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
Alvarion Breeze AP 87
Alvarion Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Alvarion Wireless Access Point
◆ Incorrect password specification leaves the login screen in an unusable state. If this occurs, the user must manually login to the device and clear the prompt.
◆ SNMP credentials are mapped to user accounts; the corresponding read/write SNMP community change must be saved (not pushed) in the UI prior to initiating the corresponding admin credential roll.
◆ Device settings are distributed among several menus. The driver displays their contents, but the results cannot be pushed.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix88
10
Aruba Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Aruba Wireless Switch.................................................................................................. 90
Aruba Devices 89
Aruba Devices
Aruba Wireless Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectID contains one of the following:
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.14823
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.6486.800.1.1.2.2.2.1.1.4
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet
• copy running-config tftp
Aruba Switch
a52, a50, a800, a2400, a5000, Alcatel OAW-6000
-
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, Out of Band, SSH, Telnet
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
Telnet, SSH, Out of Band, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix90
Aruba Devices
◆ Term
• show startup
• show run
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ TFTP
• copy tftp running-config
• copy tftp startup-config
◆ Term
• Connect to configuration mode and send one line at a time to the device
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
startup
Aruba Wireless Switch 91
Aruba Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix92
11
AudioCodes Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ AudioCodes MediaPack............................................................................................... 94
AudioCodes Devices 93
AudioCodes Devices
AudioCodes MediaPack
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations)
◆ Credential Roll
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
• Model, serial number, and operating system version using SNMP or command-line interface
• Interface table using command-line interface
Switch
MP-118FXS
http://www.audiocodes.com/
No
Running
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
5.6
SSH, Telnet
SSH, Telnet
Terminal
Ping, View Routes, View Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix94
AudioCodes Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Running configuration using SSH or Telnet:
• /conf/cf get command is issued in the command-line interface.
• The file is captured directly from the command-line interface output.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Full configuration using SSH or Telnet:
• A command-line interface session is started and the command /conf/cf set is entered.
• The system waits for the Type a . on an empty line prompt.
• The config is sent to the command-line interface session all at once followed by a period on an empty line.
• The system waits for the INI file replaced message.
• By default, following a successful push, the command /conf/sar is sent to the device to save the changes and reload the system. This can be disabled when the job is scheduled.
◆ Configlet using SSH or Telnet:
• A command-line interface session is started. Each line of the configlet is sent, one by one, preceded by the text /conf/scp.
• The responses are monitored for any error messages, and the job is stopped if an error is encountered.
• Following a successful push, the command /conf/sar is sent to the device to save the changes and reload the system. This default setting can be disabled when the job is scheduled
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
AudioCodes MediaPack 95
AudioCodes Devices
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix96
AudioCodes Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
AudioCodes MediaPack
◆ Full configs MUST use the INI file format.
◆ Configlets may be in either INI file format (parameter=value) or SetConfigParam format (parameter value). Do not include the /conf/scp command in configlet lines.
◆ If credential roll is used to add or change community strings, the new string will always be stored in string one.
AudioCodes MediaPack 97
AudioCodes Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix98
12
BlueCoat Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ BlueCoat SG ................................................................................................................. 100
BlueCoat Devices 99
BlueCoat Devices
BlueCoat SG
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-band)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• Contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.3417.1.1
◆ sysDescr
• Contains Blue Coat SG
◆ sysObjectID
◆ Maps to model in BlueCoatSGModels.xml
Content Cache
Web Proxy
http://www.bluecoat.com/support/manuals
No
Single ASCII
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-band
6.0.0
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Traceroute, View Interfaces, View Arp, View Routes
Serial Number, OS Version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix100
BlueCoat Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH:
◆ show configuration expanded noprompts
◆ Telnet/SSH (with TFTP):
◆ archive-configuration protocol tftp
◆ archive-configuration host ipAddress
◆ archive-configuration path ""
◆ archive-configuration filename-prefix remoteFilename
◆ upload configuration
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH:
• commands are issued to the CLI and the results scanned for errors
◆ Telnet/SSH (with TFTP):
• configure network "tftp://ipAddress/remoteFilename"
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
BlueCoat SG 101
BlueCoat Devices
Known issuesThe following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
BlueCoat SG
◆ No volatile or non-volatile storage information is available using SNMP for this device class.
◆ Account password rolls are performed on a device-wide account. Content is the responsibility of the user.
◆ Configuration pushes using terminal protocols (Telnet/SSH) may experience timeout problems when content includes nested inline commands. The first occurrence of end-*-inline causes the driver to expect a command prompt. This does not occur when TFTP is used for configuration management.
For example:
inline exceptions end-383770416-inline
additional content...
inline exceptions end-383770416-inline
additional content...
)
end-383770416-inline
additional content...
)
end-383770416-inline
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix102
13
Brocade Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Brocade 7500 ................................................................................................................ 104◆ Brocade McData .......................................................................................................... 107
Brocade Devices 103
Brocade Devices
Brocade 7500
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band, SNMP)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ configShow
Router
7500
http://www.brocade.com/support/resources.jsp
No
Single ASCII
Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Configlet
SSH, Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
6.0.0
Telnet, SSH
Terminal
Interfaces, Serial Number, OS Version, Hardware Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix104
Brocade Devices
Device commands
The following device menus must be enabled to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration
configShow
switchShow
◆ Password Management
snmpConfig --show snmpv1
snmpConfig --set snmpv1
passwd
userConfig --add
userConfig --delete
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes No
Brocade 7500 105
Brocade Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Brocade 7500 Router
◆ Configurations cannot be pushed in this version of the driver. The configuration displayed in response to showConfig from the command line interface does not have the same form as the commands used to configure the device.
◆ Although configuration files can be pushed and pulled by the device acting as a client using FTP/SCP, the necessary credential and server support for VoyenceControl is not implemented.
◆ No volatile or non-volatile storage information is available using SNMP for this device class.
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix106
Brocade Devices
Brocade McData
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, FRU list)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysDescr
– Value contains Fibre Channel Switch
• sysObjectID value contains one of the following:
– 1.3.6.1.4.1.289.2.1.1.2
– 1.3.6.1.4.1.289.2.2.1.2.2
◆ For Terminal:
• sysObjectID can be mapped to a model in McDataModels.xml
Switch
010000, 004500, 006064, 006140
-
ASCII Capture (no push)
Config
Telnet, SSH
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
9.6.1.5, 9.2.0.8, 09.02.01, 05.01.00
Telnet, SSH
Terminal
Test Credentials
Model, Serial Number, Software Version, FRU List (Non-SNMP only)
Brocade McData 107
Brocade Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ This device class uses a set of configurable commands in the [Product Home]/package/pkgxml/McData/McDataDeviceCommands.xml file for displaying various settings in a user-defined order.
◆ The comments in the above file include directions on changing this order, adding future model command support as software versions, and new supported products in the family.
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ This device class uses a set of configurable commands in the [Product Home]/package/pkgxml/McData/McDataDeviceCommands.xml file for obtaining configuration, hardware, and other device information in a user-defined order.
◆ The comments in the above file include directions on changing this order, adding future model command support as software versions, and new supported products in the family.
Known issuesThe following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases.
Brocade McData
◆ Memory and flash are not available from SNMP or command line interface access.
◆ The device type number is used in place of the model for both SNMP and Terminal access, as some models only report "-" for the model number in the results of show system.
◆ Some hardware detail lines show partial part numbers in the command line interface which are reported verbatim.
◆ A test using 10000 devices and running OS version 9.2.0.8 have exhibited the following behavior:
• The device does not appear to support system show at operator level access. In this case, no configuration will be shown.
• IP-related details do not appear to be available from SNMP.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix108
14
Checkpoint Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Checkpoint Firewall-1 ................................................................................................. 110
Checkpoint Devices 109
Checkpoint Devices
Checkpoint Firewall-1
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Other Unique Information
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Firewall Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.1.10.0
• FireWall-1
Firewall
Firewall-1
http://www.checkpoint.com
Yes
Can run on NG with Application Intelligence R55W or stand-alone. Unix like operating system.
Multiple Text, Multiple/Complex
Command, Config, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge
SSH/SCP, SSH Only
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, SSH, FTP, SCP
SSH, FTP, SCP
Terminal
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Ping, Traceroute, View Interfaces, View ARP, View Routes, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup, View Processor CPU, View Network Management Events, View Interface Counters
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix110
Checkpoint Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Use the expert command to get to a Unix prompt. Requires the super user password. All files are transferred using FTP or SCP.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are pushed using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Use the expert command to get to a Unix prompt. Requires the super user password. All files are transferred back using FTP or SCP.
◆ Use the Unix file commands to put the files back into place.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are retrieved using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only Type Editable Required
$base_dir/conf/netso.C Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/objects.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/InternalCA.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/snmp.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/SDS_objects.C Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/classes.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/lea_server_unification_scheme.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/log_unification_scheme.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/newobjects.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/refs.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/tables.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/userdef.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpha.conf Text Yes Yes
Checkpoint Firewall-1 111
Checkpoint Devices
$base_dir/conf/cphaprob.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpmap_config.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpmap_opsec.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpmap_rulebase.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cp.lf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/product.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwauthd.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwopsec.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/slapd.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/smtp.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/omi.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/thresholds.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwmusers Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/gui-clients Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/external.if Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cp.license Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/masters Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/*.W Text Yes Yes
/config/active Text Yes
$base_dir/state/* Binary
Yes
$base_dir/conf/serverkeys.* Binary
$base_dir/database/* Binary
Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwauth.NDB Binary
Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwauth.keys Binary
$base_dir/conf/rulebases.fws Binary
$base_dir/conf/inst.conf Text Yes
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only Type Editable Required
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix112
Checkpoint Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
3.6 Regression - Credentials (Account, Privilege and SNMP) change failed
◆ When changing Checkpoint Credentials do not change the enable password from the device communications settings. This may result in the login password being modified and subsequently, you will be denied access to the system.
Changing Checkpoint Credentials
◆ When changing Checkpoint credentials do not schedule a change of the enable password from the device communications settings. This may result in the login password being modified and subsequent denial of access to the system.
$base_dir/conf/sic_policy.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/database/cprid/cprid_keys/* Binary
$base_dir/database/cprid/cprid_util_keys/* Binary
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only Type Editable Required
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Checkpoint Firewall-1 113
Checkpoint Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix114
15
Ciena Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Ciena Router ................................................................................................................. 116
Ciena Devices 115
Ciena Devices
Ciena Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Operating System
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, FRU list)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Vendor is Ciena in response to 'show system'
◆ Serial number is retrievable
◆ sysObjectId
• Maps to model using CienaRouter/CienaRouterModels.xml
• Contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.7737.5.2.2.6
Router
4200
ciena.com
6.2.0
ASCII/Binary
Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP
Command line
Non-SNMP
In-Band
Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP
Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP
Terminal
Standard
Identity, System Properties, Interfaces, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix116
Ciena Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Change log:
• show log dbchg
◆ Device backup
• configure terminal
• maint-state enter
• save
• maint-state exit
• copy configuration to address ipAddress remoteFilePath user ftp overwrite yes
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Device restore:
• copy configuration from address ipAddress remoteFilePath user ftp
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
change log
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Ciena Router 117
Ciena Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Ciena Router
◆ The enable priv and enable admin passwords must be set to the same value to manage the device.
◆ Only SNMP credential rolls are supported.
◆ On configuration pushes (restore), the push may fail to get a verification message due to the device responding with (Destination already exists). The cause for this is not yet identified.
◆ Change logs show a revision on every pull due to entering configuration mode in order to put the device into maintenance mode to save prior to transfer.
◆ In order to generate a configuration backup, the device is briefly placed into maintenance mode; the effects of this on the managed device have not been investigated.
◆ An FTP transfer service must be configured for this device. See “Configuring FTP Transfer Service” on page 32 for more information.
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix118
16
Cisco Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Cisco Aironet AP VXWorks ....................................................................................... 120◆ Cisco PIX Firewall ....................................................................................................... 122◆ Cisco VPN 3000 ........................................................................................................... 128◆ Cisco Aironet AP Package ......................................................................................... 131◆ Cisco Aironet Bridge Package ................................................................................... 135◆ Cisco Application Control Engine ............................................................................ 138◆ Cisco BPX...................................................................................................................... 141◆ Cisco CatOS Switch Package ..................................................................................... 145◆ Cisco Content Appliance............................................................................................ 152◆ Cisco Content Services Switch .................................................................................. 156◆ Cisco Router ................................................................................................................. 159◆ Cisco IOS Switch Package.......................................................................................... 167◆ Cisco IOS XR ................................................................................................................ 174◆ Cisco Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) ................................................................. 178◆ Cisco Lightstream Package ........................................................................................ 181◆ Cisco Nexus.................................................................................................................. 184◆ Cisco MGX.................................................................................................................... 189◆ Cisco MDS .................................................................................................................... 194◆ Cisco Wide Area Application Services (WAAS) ..................................................... 197◆ Cisco Wireless LAN Controller ................................................................................. 200
Cisco Devices 119
Cisco Devices
Cisco Aironet AP VXWorks
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Configuration Capture
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysDescr
• Cisco AP340
◆ sysObjectID
• .9.1.379 or .9.1.474
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Term:
• GET /cgi-bin/cgiConfigDownloadAll?detailLevel=40 HTTP/1.1\n" ……
Note: Termlets are not supported on Cisco Aironet AP VXWorks.
Cisco Aironet AP VXWorks
340 VXWork, 1200 AP
-
Yes
Single Text
HTTP/TFTP
Command Line
SNMP
Terminal
Terminal
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix120
Cisco Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Cisco Aironet AP VXWorks 121
Cisco Devices
Cisco PIX Firewall
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Firewall Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Cisco Pix Firewall
501, 506, 506E, 515, 515E, 520, 525, 515Esc, 515Esy, 515sc, 515sy, 525sc, 525sy, 535, 535sc, 535sy, FWSM-6000, ASA5510, ASA5510-K8, ASA5520, ASA5520sc, ASA5520sy ASA5540, ASA5540sc, ASA5540sy
http://www.cisco.com
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
ASCII
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, Non-SNMP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP (not available for FWSM and ASA models), Terminal
Account, Privilege, SNMPv1/2
Operating systems for 501 models: 6.11, 6.22, 6.24, 6.35Operating systems for all other models: 6.3, 7.0, 7.2, 8.0
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal, SSH
Terminal
TFTP
SetTrapDest, Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostics, View Diagnostics Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Memory, InterfacesFor Non-SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, OS Version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix122
Cisco Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP (not available for FWSM and ASA models):
• sysObjectID value contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.9
• sysDescr value contains PIX
◆ For Non-SNMP:
• show version response contains PIX, FWSM, or Adaptive Security Appliance
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
For devices in multi-context mode, both admin and system (running and startup) configurations are pulled if discovery using non-SNMP is successful. Other contexts discovered at their respective addresses are limited to single running and startup configurations.
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• running: show run (show config if show run fails)
• startup: show config (show start if show config fails)
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• running: write net ipAddress filename
• startup: same approach as startup for Telnet and SSH above
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ PIX only supports push using Terminal. Enter enable mode, enter configuration mode, and send one configuration line at a time.
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration
show checksum
show version
show pager
show config
show start
show run
show snmp contact
Cisco PIX Firewall 123
Cisco Devices
show snmp location
show interface | include is
show interface ifName
show memory
show memory summary
show flash
show ip
show arp
show priv
enable
conf term
write mem
write net ip-addr ...
no pager
page 0
term length 0
exit
snmp-server enable traps
snmp-server host ip-addr
logging history notifications
logging on
enable
disable
◆ Password Management
aaa authentication telnet console LOCAL
aaa authentication ssh console LOCAL
aaa authentication serial console LOCAL
no username "oldName"
username "userName" password "password"
no aaa authentication telnet console LOCAL
no aaa authentication ssh console LOCAL
no aaa authentication serial console LOCAL
passwd "password"
no enable password "newPrivPass" level "level"
enable password "newPrivPass" level
snmp-server community "newSnmpROCommunity"
snmp-server host inside "ip-addr" community "community-string"
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix124
Cisco Devices
disable
enable "level"
◆ FWSM Commands (Pix 7.0)
show host
show mode
show context
change context system
change context "contextName"
◆ OS Upgrade
copy tftp flash
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
runningAdmin
runningSystem
startupAdmin
startupSystem
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists Yes
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Cisco PIX Firewall 125
Cisco Devices
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
SNMP Credential Change for PIX 515 (version 7.0)
◆ When rolling Credentials (for example, using the application's System Administration -> Networks -> Roll feature), only the credential entry relating to the application's IP address changes.
Operating System Management
◆ This device class does not currently support listing flash contents; the user must ensure sufficient space exists before scheduling the upgrade. Upgrading from version 6.x to later versions is not supported by this device class because memory and flash requirements cannot be verified by the driver.
Physical Hardware
◆ Inventory is displayed for supported devices discovered using Non-SNMP protocols for single context devices and the admin context of multi-context devices.
◆ The system context does not support hardware inventory.
Autodiscovery of spared units
◆ When discovering non-admin contexts operating in a spared configuration, the newly discovered non-admin context will replace the previous version. This is due to the non-unique combination of hostname/context, IP address, and serial number for this equipment.
◆ To avoid duplicate devices in the UI, devices in multi-context mode currently use hostname for the serial number to maintain backward-compatibility with previously discovered units for VoyenceControl upgrade scenarios.
Autodiscovery of Multiple Context
◆ Devices configured to contain multiple virtual firewall context, such as an ASA or PIX 7, must be discovered using terminal credentials. There is not enough unique information from the SNMP agent to accurately determine a unique chassis on these devices.
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix126
Cisco Devices
Cisco PIX - SNMP Discovery
◆ SNMP discovery is not available for FWSM and ASA models.
Device Naming
◆ For devices operating in multiple context mode, the device name is constructed as hostname/context.
• Hostname is initially taken from the show host response.
• Context is taken from the show context response, active context detail is listed on the line ending in *.
• When these values are identical, the hardware name shown in the show version response is used for the hostname. For example, ciscoasa up 4 days 3 hours.
Configuration Management
◆ runningSystem and startupSystem configuration files can only be pulled for the admin-equivalent context. All other contexts will pull only runningAdmin and startupAdmin configurations.
Cisco PIX Firewall 127
Cisco Devices
Cisco VPN 3000
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.1.3076 or 1.3.6.1.4.1.3076
◆ sysDescr
• contains VPN
◆ Sys Services Layer
• 3, 4, and 7
VPN concentrator
3000
http://www.cisco.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Command, Config
SSH/SCP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, Non-SNMP
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
4.1.7.G, 4.7.2.L , 4.7.2.N
FTP, SCP
FTP, SCP
Terminal
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, VLANs, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix128
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ A terminal session is used to navigate the following menu
• Administration
• File Management
• Export XML File
◆ Exported filename is CFGXML
◆ FTP or SCP used to pull file CFGXML from device
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ SCP or FTP the file CFGXML to the device
◆ A terminal session is used to navigate the following menu
• Administration
• File Management
• Import XML File (name CFGXML)
• Save changes to the configuration file
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Cisco VPN 3000 129
Cisco Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco VPN 3000
◆ For the listed software versions, the VPN Concentrator can fail pulls and pushes if an FTP session to the device is changed to a different directory than the default / directory.
• Push/pull failures due to the above problem can be verified with manual FTP sessions to the device being unable to list or transfer files. The pwd command reports the correct directory.
• The above failures will show up as failed pull or push jobs in the Scheduler, with a failed credentials error. The credentials will succeed for a Test Credentials job.
• To correct this condition, access the device with an FTP client, login, and issue cd /. After logging out, retry the failed operation.
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix130
Cisco Devices
Cisco Aironet AP Package
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.1.507 and 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.1.565
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.1.525
◆ SysDescription Contains IOS
Cisco Aironet Access Point
1100, 1130, 1200, 1210, 1240, 1310, 350IOS, AIR-AP1230A-A-K9, AP1200
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/wireless/ps430/index.html
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP, Non-SNMP
IOS, SNMP Only
SNMP, Terminal
AAA, In-Band, SNMP
12.2(13)JA, 12.3(8)JEC3
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
TFTP
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
Cisco Aironet AP Package 131
Cisco Devices
◆ SysServices Layer 2 Only
◆ Valid Cisco Rom ID
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.1.0
◆ Non-SNMP discovery
• must contain Cisco IOS or Internetwork Operating System in the results of show version
• the show vtp counters command must execute
• Cisco Enterprise ID must match models list and not be in the list of 164, 107, 533
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• show start for startup configuration
• show run for running configuration
• set oid .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.IP to the TFTP server's filename
• Fall back to Telnet/TFTP for startup configuration
• For Telnet/TFTP use the following commands:
– copy running-config tftp– copy startup-config tftp
◆ For SNMP/TFTP:
• Devices using OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB (running configuration only):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.ipAdress -> remoteFilename• Devices using CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB (id is a unique integer):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.2.id -> 1 (TFTP)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.3.id -> 1 (network file)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.4.id -> type (4: running, 3: startup)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.5.id -> serverIpAddress– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.114.id -> 1 (start transfer)
• SNMP for the running configuration only
• set oid .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.IP to the TFTP server's filename
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts, the device is brought to the enable mode using enable 15 then to the configure mode using conf t after which the configuration is entered line-by-line with checks for banners and for Invalid Input.
◆ If a banner is entered using banner motd X, the termination banner character X is stored, and there are no prompt checks until the final banner line is entered or a new prompt is detected.
◆ For SNMP/TFTP:
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix132
Cisco Devices
• Devices using OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB (running configuration only):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.ipAdress -> remoteFilename• Devices using CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB (id is a unique integer):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.2.id -> 1 (TFTP)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.3.id -> 1 (network file)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.4.id -> type (4: running, 3: startup)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.5.id -> serverIpAddress– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.114.id -> 1 (start transfer)
◆ Commit config:
• SNMP:
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.54.0 -> 1◆ To copy run to start from command line
• Copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists Yes
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts Yes
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
Cisco Aironet AP Package 133
Cisco Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco Aironet AP
◆ If the device supports CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB, then SNMP/TFTP can be used to pull and push both the running and startup configurations, otherwise only running configurations are supported.
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix134
Cisco Devices
Cisco Aironet Bridge Package
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.1.533
◆ SysDescription Contains IOS
◆ SysServices Layer 2 Only
Cisco Aironet Wireless Bridge
1300, 1410
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/wireless/ps430/index.html
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP
IOS, SNMP Only
SNMP
AAA, In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
Cisco Aironet Bridge Package 135
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show start for startup configuration
◆ show run for running configuration
◆ SNMP for the running configuration only
• set oid .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.IP to the TFTP server's filename
◆ Fall back to Telnet/TFTP for startup configuration
◆ For Telnet/TFTP use the following command:
• copy running-config tftp
• copy startup-config tftp
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts, the device is brought to the enable mode using enable 1 then to the configure mode using conf t after which the configuration is entered line-by-line with checks for banners and for Invalid Input.
◆ If a banner is entered using banner motd X, the termination banner character X is stored, and there are no prompt checks until the final banner line is entered or a new prompt is detected.
◆ SNMP for the running configuration only:
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.50.IP = filename on tftp server
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.54.0 = 1 to copy run to start
◆ To copy run to start from command line:
• Copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running --
startup --
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix136
Cisco Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists Yes
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts Yes
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Cisco Aironet Bridge Package 137
Cisco Devices
Cisco Application Control Engine
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, MAC and OS version using SNMP or command line interface.
◆ Filesystem and Memory using command line interface.
◆ Interface table using SNMP or command line interface.
Cisco Application Control Engine
ACE20-MOD-K9
www.cisco.com
-
Syslog, SNMP Traps
running, startup
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
3.0
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
Terminal
View Routes, View ARP, Ping, Resync, Clear counters, Show diag, sh ip interface brief
Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix138
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For TFTP protocols:
• copy running-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename]
• copy startup-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename]
◆ For non-TFTP protocols:
• A command line interface session is started and the output of either show run or show start is captured.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For TFTP protocols:
• copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] running-config
• copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] startup-config
◆ For non-TFTP protocols:
• A command line interface session is started, config mode is entered, and the configuration is entered line-by-line.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Running --
Startup --
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Cisco Application Control Engine 139
Cisco Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco ACE
◆ Pushing directly to the startup config using SSH only or Telnet only is not supported. To push to startup, push to the running config and then copy runnng to startup.
Virtual Contexts
◆ The Administrative context configuration is the only configuration pulled and stored from the ACE. Virtual context created on the Cisco ACE are not stored for baselines or history.
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix140
Cisco Devices
Cisco BPX
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify using SNMP and Terminal (Auto-Discovery, Identify, Appear
in Product)
◆ Incremental Updates (Configlet or Device Commands)
◆ Hardware and Interface Information
◆ Backup to Archive File
◆ SSH and Telnet Support
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands)
◆ Quick Commands
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Both SNMP and Telnet access are required to properly discover and manage the BPX.
◆ Name of device is taken from SNMP sysName.
◆ Model name is determined by the SNMP system description set by the vendor.
• Wide Area Switch = BPX 8620
Multi-Service Switch
BPX 8620
Cisco Provided
No
Binary capture to file system only
Binary, Command-Line Interface
Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP or Telnet
Binary file set by means of TFTP
Configuration by means of Configlet only
Terminal
Not currently supported
Test Credentials, Enable Automatic Backups, Disable Automatic Backups, Display Cards, Display Card, Display Port, Display Ports, Display Connection, Display Connections, Display Lines, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
Hardware provided using Terminal commands
Cisco BPX 141
Cisco Devices
◆ OS Version is determined by dspcd 7 Ram Id Field.
◆ Chassis serial number is reported as the Serial Number reported by dspcd 7.
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ savecnf <ID> <Node> * <IP> t /
Where <ID> is the backup id, Node is the name of the node, and IP is the IP address of the VoyenceControl device server.
◆ A saved configuration file set is saved in the /tftpboot directory of the device server. This configuration set contains three files needed to restore the device configuration state. The ID of the save determines the name of the subdirectory containing the saved files. The ID is VC<DDD><YY> where DDD represents the 3 digit day of the year and YY is the two digit year. For example the ID for a backup on March 2nd 2008 would be VC06208. The subdirectory containing the configuration files for restoration is named <ID>_Cfgdir as in /tftpboot/VC06208_Cfgdir for a backup on March 2nd 2008.
For Example:
-bash-3.00# ls -l /tftpboot/
drwxr-x--- 2 nobody root 4096 Mar 3 22:59 VC06308_Cfgdir
-bash-3.00# ls -l /tftpboot/VC06308_Cfgdir/
total 4984
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 256 Mar 3 20:14 D1.ALX1_BPX.000
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 2536663 Mar 3 20:35 D1.ALX1_BPX.001
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 800 Mar 3 20:14 D1.ALX1_BPX.cfg
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 256 Mar 3 22:59 D1.Madi_BPX.000
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 2536663 Mar 3 23:21 D1.Madi_BPX.001
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 800 Mar 3 22:59 D1.Madi_BPX.cfg
Note: Automatic backups will be disabled after every configuration capture.
◆ You can save a configuration if both of the following are true:
• No save or restore process is currently running.
• No configuration changes are in progress.
Configuration captures for the device have an enable and disable feature. The quick commands Disable Automatic Backups and Enable Automatic Backups are provided to prevent VoyenceControl from automatically issuing the saveallcnf after every device change. It is advisable to disable automatic backups unless the device is currently not provisioned.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix142
Cisco Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ loadcnf <ID> <Node> * <IP> t /
Where <ID> is the backup id, Node is the name of the node, and IP is the IP address of the VoyenceControl device server.
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Quick Commands
The following quick commands are provided to allow quick diagnostic commands on the device from the workspace right-click menus. Where a card number parameter is required the quick command will use the cc command to redirect the session to the appropriate card before executing the command.
• Test Credentials - Validates and tests read-only community string and login management credentials.
• Enable Automatic Backups - Enables the driver for saveallcnf operation.
• Disable Automatic Backups - Disables the driver for saveallcnf operation.
• Display Cards - Runs the dspcds command.
• Display Card - Runs the dspcd command against the given card number.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.• Display Port - Runs the dspport command, optionally supplying the slot
number.
– Parameter Slot.Port (optional) of type String.• Display Ports - Runs the dspports command, optionally supplying the slot
number.
– Parameter Slot.Port (optional) of type String.• Display Connection - Runs the dspcon command, optionall supplying the
channel and DLCI number.
– Channel (slot.port or slot.channel) of type String.– DLCI of type String.
• Display Connections - Runs the dspcons command.
• Display Lines - Runs dsplns which lists all the lines configured.
• Setup NAT - Configures the NAT IP address of the individual device.
– Parameter Device Server NAT IP of type IpAddress.• View NAT Setup - Displays the NAT IP configuration for the individual
device.
Cisco BPX 143
Cisco Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco BPX - Restore Causes Device Reset and Loss of Service
◆ Issue: Restoring the device may cause a device reset and loss of service.
◆ Resolution: This feature has not been implemented and should not be done until tested against a non-production system. The device server contains the necessary files to manually restore the device.
Cisco BPX - SNMP MIB-II shows only two interfaces
◆ Issue: BPX SNMP MIB-II shows only two interfaces.
◆ Resolution: The device SNMP agent only reports two interfaces. This is a limitation of the network device.
Cisco BPX - No SSH support
◆ Issue: No SSH support for Cisco BPX.
◆ Resolution: The Cisco BPX does not support SSH.
Cisco BPX - Screen Painting and Re-drawing Issues occur when using Cut-Through
◆ Issue: The BPX in a split screen VT100 interface. Screen painting and redrawing issues may occur when using Cut-Through.
◆ Resolution: The clrscrn command can be used to re-draw and refresh any screen issues. In addition, terminal commands will show multiple snapshots of the screen progression. This information is shown with dividers to aid in distinguishing the screen updates and associated commands.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix144
Cisco Devices
Cisco CatOS Switch Package
Device Type Cisco CatOS Switch
Specific Model(s) CAT2900XL-ATM, CAT2940, CAT2950, CAT2950LRE, CAT2955, CAT2960, CAT2970, CAT2970,CAT3550, CAT3550, CAT3560, CAT3560E, CAT3750, CAT3750, CAT3750E, CAT3750-METRO,CAT4000-AGM, CAT4000-SUP4, CAT4224, CAT4500-AGM, CAT4500-AGM, CAT4500E-SUP6E, CAT4500-SUP2-PLUS, CAT4500-SUP2-PLUS, CAT4500-SUP2-PLUS-10GE, CAT4500-SUP2-PLUS-TS, CAT4500-SUP3, CAT4500-SUP3, CAT4500-SUP4, CAT4500-SUP4, CAT4500-SUP5, CAT4500-SUP5-10GE, CAT4900M, CAT4948, CAT4948-10GE,CAT5000-ATM, CAT5000-RSFC, CAT5000-RSM, CAT5000-RSM,CAT6000-ATM, CAT6000-CMM, CAT6000-MSFC, CAT6000-MSFC2, CAT6000-MSFC2, CAT6000-MSFC2A, CAT6000-MSFC3, CAT6000-MWAM, CAT6000-SUP1/MSFC1, CAT6000-SUP1/MSFC2, CAT6000-SUP2/MSFC2, CAT6000-SUP2/MSFC2, CAT6000-SUP32/MSFC2A, CAT6000-SUP32/PISA, CAT6000-SUP720/MSFC3, CAT6000-VS-S720-10G/MSFC3, CATEXPRESS500, CATEXPRESS520,WS-C2948G-GE-TX, WS-C2948G
Documentation/Information http://www.cisco.com/
Enabled By Default Yes
Configuration Change Notification (Events) Syslog, SNMP Traps
Configuration Files Single Text
Configuration Content Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Configuration ProtocolsSSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP
User Interface IOS, SNMP Only
Discovery/Identify Methods SNMP
Password Management AAA, Out-of-Band, Enable, In-Band, SNMP
Operating System OS Upgrade
Configuration Capture Terminal, TFTP
Configuration Deploy Terminal, TFTP
Cut-Through Access Terminal
Cisco CatOS Switch Package 145
Cisco Devices
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• SysDescr must contain Catalyst and Cisco Systems WS-C5
• SysServices value shows only Layer 2 support
◆ For Terminal (Non-CatOS 1900 Devices):
• Disable paging using set length 0
• show version response contains Cisco Systems, but not IOS identifiers Cisco IOS or Internetwork Operating System
• Model information extracted from show version, response indicates a CatOS switch
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• show config all, for configuration
• show run, if show config all fails
◆ For SNMP (devices supporting CISCO-STACK-MIB, running configuration only):
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.1.0 -> serverIpAddress
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.2.0 -> remoteFilename
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.3.0 -> id (integer representing Supervisor module)
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.4.0 -> 3 (pull config from device)
◆ For Telnet/TFTP:
• write IP file all
Operating System Management Telnet/TFTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH/SCP
Switch Quick Commands View Trunk, View Neighbors, View VLAN, Ping, TraceRoute, Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
Hardware Information For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial NumberFor Non-SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix146
Cisco Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• From the console prompts, the device is brought to the enable mode using enable then to the configure mode using conf t after which the configuration is entered line-by-line with checks for banners and for invalid input.
• If a banner is entered using banner motd X, the termination banner character X is stored, and there are no prompt checks until the final banner line is entered or a new prompt is detected.
◆ For SNMP (Devices supporting CISCO-STACK-MIB, running configuration only):
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.1.0 -> serverIpAddress
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.2.0 -> remoteFilename
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.3.0 -> id (integer representing Supervisor module)
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.5.1.5.4.0 -> 2 (push config to device)
◆ For Term/TFTP/SNMP:
• copy tftp config IP file
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration
set length 0
term length 0
show boot
show run
show config
term length 0
show version
copy running-config startup-config
enable
disable
conf term
clear boot auto-config
set boot auto-config bootflash:
show ip
show snmp group
show snmp contact
show snmp hostname
Cisco CatOS Switch Package 147
Cisco Devices
show snmp location
show snmp ifalias
show cdp neighbors detail
show port status
show interfaces
write memory
write "ip-addr"
exit
tftp server "ip-addr"
copy tftp: ...
◆ Operating System Management
show module "moduleNum"
dir "partition"
reset
reset "moduleNum"
clear boot system all
set boot system flash ...
set boot config-register 0x2102
boot bootldr "imageName"
boot system flash "imageName"
copy ...
session 15
session 16
◆ Password Management
show snmp access
show snmp group
set password
enable secret 0 "newPrivPw"
no enable secret
enable password level 15
no enable password level 15
set enablepass
no snmp-server community "commString"
snmp-server community "commString"
set snmp community read-only
set snmp community read-write
set snmp user ...
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix148
Cisco Devices
set snmp view "viewName" ...
set snmp group "groupName" ...
set snmp access ...
clear snmp access ...
clear snmp user ...
◆ File Commands
copy tftp ...
copy scp ...
copy ftp ...
verify ...
verify ?
delete ...
squeeze ...
dir "partition"
dir bootflash:
dir slot0:
dir slot1:
show flash
◆ Quick Commands
ping "ip-addr"
traceroute "ip-addr"
show vlan
show trunk A
show trunk B
show trunk
show CDP neighbors detail
show cam "mac-addr"
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
Cisco CatOS Switch Package 149
Cisco Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco Catalyst OS Switches - Auto Discovery SNMP
◆ Issue: Auto Discovery with SNMP Credentials and Accounts, and Privilege Passwords may hang if the devices do not have names. For example: no name set on CAT OS Switches. Note that this may be prevalent in the CAT OS devices, due to the no name default setting on CAT OS Switches.
◆ Resolution: Set the Name on the device. On CAT OS, use the set system name command in Enable mode.
Cisco Catalyst 1900 - Serial Numbers not Displayed
◆ Serial numbers for the CAT OS 1900 devices are not being displayed.
Catalyst OS Switch 1900
◆ After a hardware pull, using either SNMP or non-SNMP mechanisms, the Non-Volatile Memory information will not display. The device does not support the display of Non-Volatile Memory. This is a device limitation. Other memory information can be accessed using the SNMP mechanism.
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table Yes
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix150
Cisco Devices
Cisco Catalyst 4000 Series
◆ The OS version for 12.2(18)EW4 for the CAT 4000 series switch displays UNKNOWN for the feature set in the application.
The device responds with UNKNOWN during an SNMP-GET.
• For example:
SNMP-GET(.1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.25.1.1.1.2.4)->CW_FEATURE$UNKNOWN$
Cisco CatOS Switch Package 151
Cisco Devices
Cisco Content Appliance
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Operating System
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appears in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Cisco Content Appliance
507, 511, 512, 560, 565, 566, 590, 611, 612, 674, 7305, 7320, 7341
5.4.3.17
http://www.cisco.com/
No
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
Account, Privilege Mode, SNMPv1/2
Telnet, SSH, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Telnet, SSH
View Interfaces, View ARP, Ping, TraceRoute, Resync, View CDP Neighbors, Resync,
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, OS Version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix152
Cisco Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysDescr value must contain Application Content Networking
• Model name is obtained from the following OIDs (in order):
– 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.368.1.34.3.0– 1.3.6.1.4.1.2467.1.34.3.0
• Part number column of the CISCO-ENTITY-ASSET-MIB for the chassis entry
◆ For Terminal:
• Show version output must contain Application Content Networking
• sysObjectId value is mapped from the model name, which is parsed from the output of show hardware for a non-blank field, in the following order:
– ModelNum (raw)– ModelNum, where (text) optionally precedes the model name– ExtModel
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show startup-config for startup configuration
◆ show running-config for running configuration
◆ For Telnet/TFTP use the following command:
• copy startup-config tftp serverAddress localFilename
• copy running-config tftp serverAddress localFilename
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts, the device is brought to the enable mode using enable. Next, more is turned off using the no terminal more or terminal length 0 command. The device is placed into configure mode using configure terminal after which the configuration is entered line-by-line.
◆ For Telnet/TFTP user the following command:
• copy tftp <serverAddress> < localFilename> startup-config
◆ To copy run to start from command line:
• copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Cisco Content Appliance 153
Cisco Devices
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
startup
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix154
Cisco Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco Content Appliance
◆ Privilege level access is controlled by the administrator account password. The administrator account cannot be rolled since it is used for the privilege password.
◆ Although users of level 0 or 15 can be created, use of a level 15 account will not prompt for an enable password even when dropping back to user level.
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Cisco Content Appliance 155
Cisco Devices
Cisco Content Services Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysDescription
• Search for Content Switch or Application and Content Networking
Cisco Content Services Switch
11050, 11501, 11503, 11506
http://www.cisco.com/
Yes
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
IOS like
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
OS Upgrade
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal
View Interfaces, View ARP, Ping, TraceRoute, Resync, View Interfaces, View CDP Neighbors, Resync,
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix156
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show startup-config for startup configuration
◆ show running-config for running configuration
◆ For telnet/tftp use the following command:
• copy startup-config tftp SERVERIPADDR localFile
• copy running-config tftp SERVERIPADDR localFile
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts, the device is brought to the enable mode using enable 15. Next, more is turned off using no terminal more command. The device is placed into configure mode using conf t after which the configuration is entered line by line.
◆ For Telnet/TFTP user the following command:
• copy tftp SERVERIPADDR localFile startup-config
◆ To copy run to start from command line:
• Copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
startup
Cisco Content Services Switch 157
Cisco Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix158
Cisco Devices
Cisco Router
Device Type Cisco Router
Specific Model(s) 1700, 1711, 1801, 1801W, 1811, 1841, 1000, 1003, 1020, 1004, 1005, 1601, 1602, 1603, 1604, 1605, 12012, 12004, 12008, 1710, 1720, 1401, 1750, 1407, 1417, 12416, 12406, 12410, 1760,12404, 1721, 1751, 12010, 10400, 12016, 10720, 1701, 1720VPN, 1941/K9, 1941W-A/K9, 2000, 2500, 2102, 2202, 2501, 2502, 2503, 2504, 2505, 2506, 2507, 2508, 2509, 2510, 2511, 2512, 2513, 2514, 2515, 2801, 2821, 2517, 2518, 2519, 2520, 2521, 2522, 2523, 2524, 2525, 2516, 2610, 2611, 2612, 2613, 2620, 2621, 2501FRADFX, 2501LANFRADFX, 2502LANFRADFX, 2610M, 2611M, 2610XM, 2611XM, 2620XM, 2621XM, 2650XM, 2651XM, 2691, 2650, 2651, 2811, 2851, 2901/K9, 2911/K9, 2921/K9, 2951, 2951/K9, 3000, 3825, 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3202, 3204, 3220, 3845, 3620, 3640, 3251, 3660, 3661Ac, 3661Dc, 3662Ac, 3662Dc, 3662AcCo, 3662DcCo, 3631, 3745, 3725, 3825, 3845, 3925, 3945,4000, 4500,6000, 6100, 6130, 6260, 6400, 6400Nrp, 677i, 674, 6400UAC,761, 762, 765, 766, 771, 772, 775, 776, 751, 752, 753, 7000, 7010, 7507, 7513, 7505, 4700, 7206, 7576, 7204, 7202, 7206VXR, 7204VXR, 7507z, 7513z, 7507mx, 7513mx, 7120At3, 7120Ae3, 7120Smi3, 7140Dualt3, 7140Duale3, 7140Dualat3, 7140Dualae3, 7140Dualmm3, 7750Mrp200, 7120Quadt1, 7120T3, 7120E3, 7140Octt1, 7140Dualfe, 7750Ssp80, 7609OSR, 7750, 7603, 7606, 7606-S, 7304, 7609, 7613,801, 802, 803, 804, 805, 828, 806, 811, 8110, 813, 8510, 8515, 826QuadV, 826, 827QuadV, 811, 827, 831837,827H, 836,AS5200, AS2509RJ, AS2511RJ, AS5300, AS5800, AS5400, AS5350,ASR 1000, ASR 1004AIR-AP1120B-A-K95,Cat6000,CS500,Catalyst6kMsfc2, Catalyst5kRsfc, Catalyst6kMsfc, Catalyst295024GDC, Catalyst3200, Catalyst3100, Catalyst1800, Catalyst1601, Catalyst3001,CE7305, CE510,DPA7630,GSS,IAD2430, IAD2431, IAD2432, IAD2431-8FXS, IAD2431-16FXS, IAD2431-1T1E1, IAD2432-24FXS,MC3810, Mc3810V3,ONS15540ESPx,Pro1003, Pro1004, Pro1005, Pro2500PCE, Pro2501, Pro2503, Pro2505, Pro2507, Pro2509, Pro2511, Pro2514, Pro2516, Pro2519, Pro4500, Pro751, Pro752, Pro753, Pro765, Pro766, Pro2520, Pro2522, Pro2524, Pro1601, Pro1602, Pro1603, Pro1604, Pro2502, Pro2504, Pro2506, Pro2508, Pro2510, Pro2512, Pro2513, Pro2515, Pro2517, Pro2518, Pro2523, Pro2525, Pro4700,SOHO77, SOHO76, SOHO97, SOHO91, SOHO96,UBR7246, UBR904, UBR7223, UBR924, UBR7246VXR,UBR912C, UBR912S, UBR914, UBR925, UBR10012, UBR7111, UBR7111E, UBR7114, UBR7114E, UBR905, WSX5302, WS-C6506-E
Documentation/Information http://www.cisco.com/
Enabled By Default Yes
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Cisco Router 159
Cisco Devices
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysObjectID value contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.9
• sysDescription value contains IOS or Internetwork Operating System
• sysServices value indicates a Layer 3 device
• Cisco Rom ID (.1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.1.0) is retrievable
◆ For Terminal:
• Device responds with an error to show vtp counters
Configuration Files Single Text
Configuration ContentQuick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Configuration ProtocolsSSH/SCP, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP, Non-SNMP
User Interface IOS, SNMP Only
Discovery/Identify Methods SNMP, Terminal
Password Management AAA, Out-of-Band, Enable, In-Band, SNMP
Operating System Boot Upgrade, OS UpgradeFor 1801W Models: 12.4(4)XC3, 12.4(24)T1For 1941/K9, 941W-A/K9, 2901/K9, 2911/K9, 2921/K9, 2951/K9, 3925, and 3945 Models: 12.4(24.6)For 2951 Models: 12.4(23.15.8), 12.4(24.6)
Configuration Capture SSH/Terminal, TFTP
Configuration Deploy SSH/Terminal, TFTP
Cut-Through Access Terminal
Quick Commands View Routes, View ARP, Ping, TraceRoute, Resync, show frame-relay map, Clear counters, Show diag, Show process cpu, Show management event, sh ip interface brief
Hardware Information For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, VLANs, Memory, Interfaces, Serial NumberFor Non-SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Hardware Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix160
Cisco Devices
• show version response contains Internetwork Operating System or Cisco IOS
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• startup configuration : show start
• running configuration: show run
◆ For SNMP/TFTP:
• Devices using OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB (running configuration only):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.ipAdress -> remoteFilename• Devices using CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB (id is a unique integer):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.2.id -> 1 (TFTP)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.3.id -> 1 (network file)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.4.id -> type (4: running, 3: startup)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.5.id -> serverIpAddress– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.114.id -> 1 (start transfer)
◆ For Terminal/TFTP:
• copy running-config tftp
• copy startup-config tftp
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts, the device is put into configuration mode using enable 15 and configure terminal, and if successful, the configuration is issued line-by-line with checks for banner content and invalid input messages.
◆ If a banner is entered using banner motd X, the termination banner character X is stored, and there are no prompt checks until the final banner line is entered or a new prompt is detected.
◆ SNMP/TFTP:
• Devices supporting OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB (running configuration only):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.50.ipAddress -> remoteFilename• Devices supporting CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB (id is a unique integer):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.2.id -> 1 (TFTP)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.3.id -> type (4: running, 3: startup)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.4.id -> 1 (network file)– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.1.5.id -> serverIpAddress– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.96.1.1.1.114.id -> 1 (start transfer)
◆ Commit config:
• SNMP:
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.54.0 -> 1
Cisco Router 161
Cisco Devices
• Terminal:
– copy running-config startup-config
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration
show run
show start
show version
show config
show interfaces
configure term
terminal length 0
exit
write memory
reload
copy running-config tftp
copy startup-config tftp
copy running-config startup-config
copy tftp running-config
show file systems
show module
show vtp counters
show memory summary
dir
dir nvram:
dir flash:
squeeze flash:
show priv
show bootvar
show snmp contact
show snmp location
show interface | include is
◆ Operating System Management
config-register 0x2102
show file systems
reload
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix162
Cisco Devices
hw-module module "moduleNum"
hw-module standby reload
archive download-sw /overwrite tftp:...
archive download-sw /safe tftp:...
◆ Password Management
show snmp group
snmp-server user ...
snmp-server engineID local
snmp-server context ...
snmp-server view ...
snmp-server group ...
snmp-server community ...
aaa new-model
no aaa new-model
line console 0
line vty 0
login
password
exit
line aux 0
no username ...
username "userName" privilege "userLevel" password "password"
no enable secret level
no enable password level
enable secret level
enable password level
◆ Quick Commands
ping "ip-addr"
show ip route
show arp
show ip interface brief
clear counters
show process cpu
show management event
copy run start
traceroute "ip-addr"
show vlan
Cisco Router 163
Cisco Devices
show logging
show cdp neighbors detail
show frame-relay map
show diag
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
Startup
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists Yes
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts Yes
OSPF Settings Yes
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix164
Cisco Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco IOS - Out-of-Sync
◆ When a SNMP/TFTP mechanism is used with only a Community String credential, the Running against Startup Configuration Out-of-Sync icon is not displayed. A valid Account and/or Privilege Password credential is needed to pull the Startup configuration on Cisco IOS devices.
Cisco IOS Update
◆ Issue: An issue exists where the OS image resided in bootflash, but was not the boot loader image. Additionally, the system image file was not in the show version command. In this case, the application could not free space in the target location. Manual intervention is needed to free space.
When there is insufficient space in the target location for an OS update on Cisco IOS devices with Class A file systems, the system attempts to free up additional space by deleting and squeezing the system image name displayed in the show version command.
◆ For example:
r2621-vpn uptime is 6 weeks, 5 days, 1 hour, 0 minutes
System returned to ROM by reload
System image file is "flash:c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.122-15.T9.bin"
◆ Resolution: Manually, complete a delete and squeeze on that filename before beginning the OS update.
Cisco 3845
◆ Memory is not currently supported for the Cisco 3845.
Cisco 7206
◆ Issue: Cisco Model 7206 does not correctly display the Hardware Controller I/O Controller version. It incorrectly displays the version as 0.0. This issue is present with IOS Version 12.0(4)XE2, and not in Version 12.2(25)S2.
◆ Resolution: Cisco Model 7206 should be upgraded to a new IOS version.
TFTP Pushes May Fail Silently
◆ Silent configuration command failures may occur when using any of the TFTP transfer methods (snmp/tftp, ssh/tftp, or telnet/tftp). Error status, if any, is being missed from the device following the transfer.
Cisco Router 165
Cisco Devices
TACACS+ Implementation
◆ Issue: Some versions of IOS have a TACACS+ implementation issue that causes additional characters to be added to the login User Name. When this occurs, it may cause occasional login failures.
◆ Resolution: Modify a custom version of the stdlib/stdterm.inc file to issue a backspace character before the username as shown below.
1. Make a directory named $VOYENCE_HOME/custompackage/stdlib
2. Copy the file $VOYENCE_HOME/package/stdlib/stdterm.inc to $VOYENCE_HOME/custompackage/stdlib/stdterm.inc
3. Change the termLogin() function in this new file:
• Search for: send(session,userId+stdEOL,true);
• Change to: send(session,asc(0x08)+userId+stdEOL,true);
• After making the change, restart the device server services.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix166
Cisco Devices
Cisco IOS Switch Package
Device Type Cisco IOS Switch
Specific Model(s) Catalyst Models: 1000, 1100, 1116, 116C, 116T, 1200, 1220, 1220c, 1220i, 1400, 1420, 1600, 1601, 1800, 1900, 1900c, 1900i, 1900 Lite Fx, 1912C,2200, 2820, 2900, 2908ga, 2908xl, 2912MfXL, 2912XL, 2916, 2924CXL, 2924CXLv, 2924MXL, 2924XL, 2924XLv, 2926, 2940 8TF, 2940 8TT, 2948g, 2950-12, 2950-24, 2950-24C, 2950 24GDC, 295024LREG, 295048T, 2950 St24LRE997, 2950 t24, 2955C12, 2955T12, 297024, 297024TS, 2980g,3000, 3001, 3100, 3200, 3201 WMIC, 3500, 3508GXL, 3512XL, 3524XL, 3550-12T, 3550-24, 3550-48, 3560-24PS, 3560-24TS, 3560-48PS, 3560-48TS, 3560G-24PS, 3560G-24TS, 3560G-48TS, 375024, 375024ME, 375024T, 375024TS, 375048, 3750G16TD, 3750Ge12Sfp, 37xxStack, 3900, 3920,4000NAM, 4003, 4006, 4503, 4506, 4507, 4510, 4912g, 4948, 4948-10G, 4k Gateway,5000, 5002, 5500, 5505, 5509, 5k Rsfc,6006, 6009, 6506, 6509, 6509neb, 6513, 6k Msfc, 6k Msfc2, 6knam,8510 msr, 8515 msr, 8540csr, 8540msr,9006, 9009IE3000, IE-3000-4TC,ME3400,WS-CBS3120G-S, WS-C2960G-24TC-L, WS-C3750-48TS, WS-C6509
Documentation/Information http://www.cisco.com/
Enabled By Default Yes
Configuration Change Notification (Events) Syslog, SNMP Traps
Configuration Files Single Text, Binary
Configuration Content Quick Commands, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Configuration Protocols SSH/SCP, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP, Non-SNMP
User Interface IOS, SNMP Only
Discovery/Identify Methods SNMP, Terminal
Password Management AAA, Out-of-Band, Enable, In-Band, SNMP
Operating System Boot Upgrade, OS UpgradeFor IE-3000-4TC Models: 12.2(0.0.109)EXFor WS-C2960G-24TC-L Models: 12.2(44)SE LAYER_2
Configuration Capture Terminal, TFTP
Configuration Deploy Terminal, TFTP
Cut-Through Access Terminal
Operating System Management Terminal, TFTP
Cisco IOS Switch Package 167
Cisco Devices
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysObjectID value contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.9 or 1.3.6.1.4.1.11
• sysDescription value contains IOS or Internetwork Operating System
• sysService value indicates Layer 2 or non-Layer-3 device
• Valid Cisco ROM ID (.1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.1.0) value
◆ For Non-SNMP
• show version output contains Internetwork Operating System or Cisco IOS
• Device gives a positive reponse to show vtp counters
• Model name (from show version output) corresponds to CatOS family of products
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• startup configuration : show start
• running configuration: show run
◆ For SNMP/TFTP:
• Devices using OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB (running configuration only):
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.ipAdress -> remoteFilename
Quick CommandsView Interfaces, View ARP, Resync, show cdp neighbors detail
Switch Quick Commands View VLAN, Ping, TraceRoute, view logs using "show logging", Resync, View CDP Neighbors, View Interfaces, View ARP
Hardware Information For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, VLANs, Memory, Interfaces, Serial NumberFor Non-SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix168
Cisco Devices
◆ For Terminal/TFTP:
• copy running-config tftp
• copy startup-config tftp
◆ For VLAN Database:
• VLAN Text:
– vlan database– show current
• Binary VLAN Database
– dir partitionName:– copy partitionName:/vlan.dat tftp://serverip/filename
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts, the device is put into configuration mode using enable 15 and configure terminal, and if successful, the configuration is issued line-by-line with checks for banner content and invalid input messages.
◆ If a banner is entered using banner motd X, the termination banner character X is stored, and there are no prompt checks until the final banner line is entered or a new prompt is detected.
◆ SNMP/TFTP:
• Devices supporting OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB (running configuration only):
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.50.ipAddress -> remoteFilename◆ Commit config:
• SNMP:
– .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.54.0 -> 1 • Terminal:
– copy running-config startup-config◆ For Binary vlan database:
• copy tftp://serverip/file medium:vlan.dat
Device commands Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration
show run
show start
show version
show config
show interfaces
configure term
terminal length 0
exit
Cisco IOS Switch Package 169
Cisco Devices
write memory
reload
copy running-config tftp
copy startup-config tftp
copy running-config startup-config
copy tftp running-config
show file systems
show module
show vtp counters
show memory summary
dir
dir nvram:
dir flash:
squeeze flash:
show priv
show bootvar
show snmp contact
show snmp location
show interface | include is
◆ Operating System Management
config-register 0x2102
show file systems
reload
hw-module module "moduleNum"
hw-module standby reload
archive download-sw /overwrite tftp:...
archive download-sw /safe tftp:...
◆ Password Management
show snmp group
snmp-server user...
snmp-server engineID local
snmp-server context ...
snmp-server view ...
snmp-server group ...
snmp-server community ...
aaa new-model
no aaa new-model
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix170
Cisco Devices
line console 0
line vty 0
login
password
exit
line aux 0
no username ...
username "userName" privilege "userLevel" password "password"
no enable secret level
no enable password level
enable secret level
enable password level
◆ Quick Commands
ping "ip-addr"
view ip route
view arp
view ip interface brief
clear counters
view process cpu
view management event
copy run start
traceroute "ip-addr"
view vlan
view logging
view cdp neighbors detail
view frame-relay map
view diag
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
Startup
Vlan.dat
Vlan text
Cisco IOS Switch Package 171
Cisco Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco IOS Switches - Missing VLAN Database Command
◆ The ME3400 does not return VLAN text, due to lack of support for the vlan database command. This will appear in the scheduler with a message of the form: Dialog getVLANs failed: Warning, can not resolve input value (ConfigFile:vlan text.Content)
Cisco IOS Switches - VLAN Databases
◆ To pull VLAN Databases successfully, the device must be discovered as a Cisco IOS Switch.
◆ If it is not discovered as a Cisco IOS switch, you must edit the IOSModels.XML in $VOYENCE_HOME/custompackage /pkgxml, and then re-discover the device.
Cisco IOS Switches - Missing Hardware Information
◆ Issue: Cisco IOS Switches with OS version 12.0 (5.2) XU do not display device OS information correctly in the Device Hardware tab.
◆ Resolution: Disable all SNMP Credentials, and then Pull the Hardware using Non-SNMP. Doing this ensures the memory size is pulled correctly, and is then populated using the terminal commands. This must be completed before beginning an OS Upgrade.
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists Yes
CAM Table Yes
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control List Match Counts Yes
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol Yes
VLANs Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix172
Cisco Devices
Cisco IOS - Out-of-Sync
◆ When a SNMP/TFTP mechanism is used with only a Community String credential, the Running against Startup Configuration Out-of-Sync icon is not displayed. A valid Account and/or Privilege Password credential is needed to pull the Startup configuration on Cisco IOS devices.
Cisco IOS Upgrade - SNMP Information
◆ There is no available OS install target for the 3524 Switch.
• Issue: SNMP information is not present for this model. The information must be retrieved from the IOS CLI.
• Resolution: Remove all SNMP community strings from the communication settings of the device, and re-pull the hardware specification. This provides the needed memory information to allow for an OS upgrade.
Cisco IOS Update
◆ Issue: An issue exists where the OS image resided in bootflash, but was not the boot loader image. Additionally, the system image file was not in the show version command. In this case, the application could not free space in the target location. Manual intervention is needed to free space.
When there is insufficient space in the target location for an OS update on Cisco IOS devices with Class A file systems, the system attempts to free up additional space by deleting and squeezing the system image name displayed in the show version command.
◆ For example:
r2621-vpn uptime is 6 weeks, 5 days, 1 hour, 0 minutes
System returned to ROM by reload
System image file is "flash:c2600-ik9o3s3-mz.122-15.T9.bin"
◆ Resolution: Manually, complete a delete and squeeze on the filename before beginning the OS update.
TFTP Pushes May Fail Silently
◆ Silent configuration command failures may occur when using any of the TFTP transfer methods (SNMP/TFTP, SSH/TFTP, or Telnet/TFTP). Error status, if any, is being missed from the device following the transfer.
TACACS+ Implementation
◆ Issue: Some versions of IOS have a TACACS+ implementation issue that causes additional characters to be added to the login User Name. When this occurs, it may cause occasional login failures.
◆ Resolution: Modify a custom version of the stdlib/stdterm.inc file to issue a backspace character before the username as shown below.
1. Make a directory named $VOYENCE_HOME/custompackage/stdlib
2. Copy the file $VOYENCE_HOME/package/stdlib/stdterm.inc to
$VOYENCE_HOME/custompackage/stdlib/stdterm.inc
3. Change the termLogin() function in this new file:
• Search for: send(session,userId+stdEOL,true);
• Change to: send(session,asc(0x08)+userId+stdEOL,true);
• After making the change, restart the device server services.
Cisco IOS Switch Package 173
Cisco Devices
Cisco IOS XR
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Upgrade (Upgrade Operating System Files and Activate
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, MAC and OS version from the command line interface
◆ Filesystem and Memory from the command line interface
◆ Interface table from the command line interface
Cisco IOS XR Network Operating System
CRS-1, 12000XR Series
http://www.cisco.com/
Syslog, SNMP Traps (disabled by default)
Text based running config and admin config
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
Version 3.4 and higher
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP (FTP protocols require external FTP server)
Ping, Traceroute, View NAT Setup, View Routes, View ARP, View Interfaces, Clear Interface Counters, View Diagnostic
Chassis, Slot/Card Inventory, Interfaces, Power, Fans, Memory, FileSystems
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix174
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• copy running-config tftp://[server_ip]/[filename]
◆ For SSH and Telnet
• show running-config
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• copy tftp://[server_ip]/[filename] running-config
◆ For SSH and Telnet
• The device is brought to a shell prompt in config mode.
• The configuration is entered line-by-line with checks for invalid input.
Operating System Management
The following are the commands that are used to do an operating system upgrade.
◆ install remove inactive sync
• This command is optional.
◆ install add [proto]://[serverip]/[osfile] sync
• This command is executed once for each upgrade file in the job.
◆ install activate [filelist] sync
• This command is executed once, with a list of all files added in the previous step.
◆ install commit sync
• This command is optional.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Running
Admin
Packages
Cisco IOS XR 175
Cisco Devices
Device data The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco IOS XR Network Operating System
◆ The Cisco IOS XR - Secure Domain Router functionality is not supported.
◆ This device driver does not interface with the Cisco IOS XR's configuration store and commit lists.
Cisco IOS XR - Login Credentials
◆ It is advisable to use login credentials that belong to the root-system group, for this driver. All credentials created by this driver will belong to the root-system group.
◆ When rolling a login credential, an attempt to place the new user in the same user groups with the old user is made.
◆ Login credentials cannot be rolled if TACACS or Radius authentication is in use.
• To identify if TACACS/Radius is in use, the show [tacacs|radius] server-groups command is used.
• Login credentials will not be rolled if the output of the show [tacacs|radius] server-groups command has a global list of servers indicating external authentication is in use.
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix176
Cisco Devices
Cisco IOS XR - SNMP Communities
◆ It is advisable to use SNMP communities that belong to the SystemOwner attribute set, with this driver. All communities created by this driver will belong to the SystemOwner attribute set.
Cisco IOS XR - Conifguration Changes
◆ When pushing config changes, If a commit fails when pushing configuration changes to the device, the show configuration failed command is issued. The results for the show configuration failed command is included in the output of the jobs result text.
◆ Push to the user mode config is currently the only capture command supported
Cisco IOS XR 177
Cisco Devices
Cisco Intrusion Prevention System (IPS)
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management System (Used to update signature files)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, and OS version using SNMP or Command-Line Interface
◆ Memory using Command-Line Interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or Command-Line Interface
Cisco Intrusion Prevention System
IPS-4255-K9
www.cisco.com
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Running
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH, Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
6.1
SSH, Telnet
SSH, Telnet
Terminal
Yes
Ping, Traceroute, Show diag
Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix178
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ A command line interface session is started and the output of show configuration is captured.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ A command line interface session is started, config mode is entered, and the configuration is entered line-by-line.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Running
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Cisco Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) 179
Cisco Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco Intrusion Prevention System (IPS)
◆ Banner input is error prone. Do not put the word exit on a line by itself in a banner.
◆ This driver was built on an IPS-4255 but should manage any Cisco IPS/IDS 42xx system.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix180
Cisco Devices
Cisco Lightstream Package
Device Type Cisco Lightstream ATM Switch
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.1.164
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.1.107
◆ SysServices Layer 3 Only
◆ Valid Cisco ROM ID in SNMP
Specific Model(s) LS 1010, LS 1015
Documentation/Information http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps1893/index.html
Enabled By Default Yes
Configuration Change Notification (Events) Syslog, SNMP Traps
Configuration Files Single Text
Configuration Content Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Configuration Protocols SSH/SCP, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP
User Interface IOS, SNMP Only
Discovery/Identify Methods SNMP
Password Management AAA, In-Band, SNMP
Configuration Capture Terminal, TFTP
Configuration Deploy Terminal, TFTP
Cut-Through Access Terminal
Hardware Information For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
Cisco Lightstream Package 181
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show start for startup configuration
◆ show run for running configuration
◆ SNMP for the running configuration only
• set OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.55.IP to the TFTP server's filename
• Fall back to Telnet/TFTP for startup configuration
◆ For Telnet/TFTP use the following command:
• copy running-config tftp
• copy startup-config tftp
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts, the device is brought to the enable mode using enable 15 then to the configure mode using conf t after which the configuration is entered line by line with checks for banners and for Invalid Input.
◆ If a banner is entered using banner motd X, the termination banner character X is stored, and there are no prompt checks until the final banner line is entered or a new prompt is detected.
◆ SNMP for the running configuration only
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.50.IP = filename on tftp server
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.9.2.1.54.0 = 1 to copy run to start
◆ To copy run to start from command line
• Copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running ¸
Startup
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix182
Cisco Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists Yes
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts Yes
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Cisco Lightstream Package 183
Cisco Devices
Cisco Nexus
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Management (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Device model must be accessible from ENTITY-MIB's chassis entry (SNMP) or appear as Cisco NexusNNNN Chassis in response to 'show inventory' (terminal).
◆ Interface information must be obtainable from IF-MIB (SNMP) or parsed from show interface.
◆ sysObjectID value must be readable from SNMPv2-MIB (SNMP) or mapped by model name from CiscoModels.xml.
Switch
1000V,5010, 5020,C7010, C7018,MDS 9222i
www.cisco.com
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
SNMP, Account
4.0(1a)N1(1a)For MDS 9222i Models: 4.1(3a)For 1000V Models: 4.0(4)SV1(1)
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
In-Band
Memory, Serial number, Software Version, Inventory, File System
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix184
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• show running-config
• show startup-config
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• copy running-config /tftp://remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename
• copy startup-config /tftp://remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename
Configuration deployThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• Active configuration command are replayed using the command line, and the results are checked for fatal errors
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• copy tftp://remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename running-config
• copy tftp://remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename startup-config
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
terminal length 0
show version
show inventory
show snmp
show hostname
show running-config
show startup-config
configure terminal
copy running-config startup-config
copy (runnig-config|startup-config) tftp://address/path
reboot
copy ? (to determine filesystem name)
delete ?
format ?
dir (?|name)
Cisco Nexus 185
Cisco Devices
ping
traceroute
show ip interface vrf all
show route vrf all
show arp vrf all
◆ Password Management
[no] snmp community token (ro|rw)
show aaa authentication
show users
username token password secret role network-admin
[no] username token
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Running
Startup
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix186
Cisco Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Cisco Nexus 187
Cisco Devices
Known issues The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco Nexus
◆ The driver supports the MDS series running NX-OS if Nexus or NX-OS appears in the show version response, and the driver is successful in determining the identity, system properties, and interfaces for the device.
◆ The management VRF must have a default route configured or file transfers will fail.
◆ If the command system default switchport appears literally in the configuration, it must be removed or commented out before pushing with terminal, or the resulting % Incomplete command message will be treated as a failure, although the push content will be accepted.
◆ Privilege account rolls are not supported because accounts are role based, and VoyenceControl credentials are give network-admin privileges. Any attempt to execute a job including privilege credential changes will fail.
◆ IP addresses and ARP table entries are not reported using SNMP.
◆ Config Change Detection is only supported using syslog monitoring.
◆ Switches running 4.0(4)SV1(1) have been observed to intermittently fail account credential rolls when both the account and password are changed.
• A failsafe in the device prevents deletion of the original account, if the account is logged in.
• The driver executes a show users command if this message is detected, but the account does not appear in the response.
• Currently, only the account password can be successfully changed. This behavior is not observed on the hardware products.
Cisco Nexus 1000V
◆ Push to start is not supported.
• The copy tftp startup command is deprecated.
• The config content is silently ignored, although the job shows as successful in the scheduler.
• The recommended Cisco procedure of write erase, reload, copy tftp running cannot be implemented due to a high probability of the application and managed device being located on different subnets.
◆ The Nexus 1000V virtual switch running 4.0(4)SV1(1) has been found to include commands that cannot be pushed back to the device from the command-line interface. Such content must be commented out or removed prior to scheduling a full configuration push or the job will fail (though other changes will effectively succeed). This behavior has not been observed for pushes using TFTP. An example of these commands is included below; other forms may occur as well.
• limit-resource u4route-mem minimum 32 maximum 80
• limit-resource u6route-mem minimum 16 maximum 48
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix188
Cisco Devices
Cisco MGX
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify using SNMP and Terminal (Auto-Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Incremental Updates (Configlet or Device Commands)
◆ Hardware and Interface Information
◆ Backup and Restore from Archive File
◆ SSH and Telnet Support
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands)
◆ Quick Commands
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
Multi-Service Switch
8850 Wide Area Switch - MGX 8850 PXM-45 and MGX 8250 PXM-1
Cisco Provided
No
Binary backup to file system of compressed archive
Binary, Command-Line Interface
SSH or Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Telnet, or SSH
Single Account Credential Password only, SNMP Read and Read-Write
5.2
Compressed Tar Archive by means of FTP
Compressed Tar Archive by means of FTP, Device Commands, Configlets
Terminal
Enable Automatic Backups, Disable Automatic Backups, Display Cards, Display Card, Display IMA Groups, Display IMA Group Counters, Display IMA Link Counters, Display Alarms, Display Hardware Alarms, Display Software Alarms, Display Port Counters, Display Port, Display Ports, Display Connection, Display Lines, Display PNNI Node, Display PNNI Node List, Display PNNI Neighbor, Display PNNI Link, Display PNNI Routing Policy, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
Hardware provided by means of SNMP using Entity MIB or Terminal
Cisco MGX 189
Cisco Devices
Both SNMP and Telnet or SSH access are required to properly discover and manage the MGX.
◆ Name of device is taken from dspcds NodeName field.
◆ Model name is determined by the SNMP system description set by the vendor.
◆ Model Cisco MGX 8850 Wide Area Switch = 8850 PXM-45
◆ Wan Edge Switch = 8250 PXM-1
◆ OS Version is determined by dspcds either from the System Rev or PXM firmware version depending on the PXM version.
◆ Chassis serial number is determined by the dsplicnodeid command on the PXM-45 and the dspcds BkplnSerialNum on the PXM-1.
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ saveallcnf -f
A saved configuration file is named using the switch name and the current date as follows:
switchname_dateCode<N|O>. The saved configuration file will reside in the /tftpboot directory of the device server. The device driver will report the saveallcnf results along with the name of the file stored as a result of the capture operation.
Note: Automatic backups will be disabled after every configuration capture.
◆ You can save a configuration if both of the following are true:
• No save or restore process is currently running.
• No configuration changes are in progress.
Configuration captures for the device have an enable and disable feature. The quick commands Disable Automatic Backups and Enable Automatic Backups are provided to prevent VoyenceControl from automatically issuing the saveallcnf after every device change. This feature should remain disabled unless a backup is required.
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ restoreallcnf -f
This command is issued after a backup capture is transferred to the machine using FTP. This backup is named in the revision history as "FILE: <BackupName> SAVED: <Date>" Sending the string as described shown in VoyenceControl will initiate the transfer and restoreallcnf command.
If these files are needed for manual restore procedures they can be found in the /tftpboot directory of the VoyenceControl device server.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix190
Cisco Devices
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Quick Commands
The following quick commands are provided to allow quick diagnostic commands on the device from the workspace right-click menus. Where a card number parameter is required the quick command will use the "cc" command to redirect the session to the appropriate card before executing the command.
• Test Credentials - Validates and tests read-only community string and login management credentials.
• Enable Automatic Backups - Enables the driver for saveallcnf operation.
• Disable Automatic Backups - Disables the driver for saveallcnf operation.
• Display Cards - Runs the dspcds command.
• Display Card - Runs the dspcd command, optionally supplying the SRM slot number.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.– Parameter SRM Slot Number (optional) of type Integer.
• Display IMA Groups- Runs the dspimagrps command.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.• Display IMA Group Counters - Runs the dspimagrpcnt supplying the
bay.group and interval.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.– Parameter Bay Number 1-2 of type Integer.– Parameter Group Number 1-16 of type Integer.– Parameter Interval 0-96 of type Integer.
• Display IMA Link Counters - Runs the dspimalncnt and/or dspimalnkcnt commands depending on the PXM version.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.– Parameter Interface Number of type Integer.– Parameter IMA Member Link of type Integer.
• Display Alarms - Runs the dspalms command.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.• Display Hardware Alarms - Runs the dsphwalm command.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.• Display Software Alarms - Runs the dspswalm command.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.• Display Port Counters - Runs the dspportcnt command providing the
interface number and interval.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.– Parameter Interface Number 1-31 of type Integer.– Parameter Interval (optional) of type Integer.
• Display Port - Runs the dspport command providing the interface number.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.– Parameter Interface Number of type Integer.
Cisco MGX 191
Cisco Devices
• Display Ports - Runs the dspports command.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.• Display Connection - Runs the dspcon command.
– Parameter Card or Interface Number of type Integer.– Parameter Port ID of type Integer.– Parameter vpi range of type Integer.– Parameter vci range of type Integer.– Parameter DLCI (optional FRSM only) of type Integer.
• Display Lines - Runs the dsplns command.
– Parameter Card Number of type Integer.– Parameter SRM Slot Number (optional) of type Integer.
• Display PNNI Node - Runs dsppnni-node
• Display PNNI Node List - Runs dsppnni-node-list
• Display PNNI Neighbor - Runs dsppnni-neighbor
• Display PNNI Link - Runs dsppnni-link
• Display PNNI Routing Policy - Runs dsppnni-routing-policy
• Setup NAT - Configures the NAT IP address of the individual device.
– Parameter Device Server NAT IP of type IpAddress.• View NAT Setup - Displays the NAT IP configuration for the individual
device.
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco MGX - Restore Causes Device Reset and Loss of Service
◆ Issue: Restoring the device capture causes a device reset and loss of service.
◆ Resolution: Testing shows the loss of service is in the range of 2 to 5 minutes.
Cisco MGX - PXM-1 Card Shows Only Two Interfaces
◆ Issue: PXM-1 cards show only two interfaces.
◆ Resolution: The device SNMP agent only reports two interfaces. This is a limitation of the network device.
Cisco PXM-1 Cards - MIB not entirely Supported
◆ Issue: PXM-1 cards do not support the Entity MIB and hardware information is displayed differently than a PXM-45 card.
◆ Resolution: The models having PXM-1 cards require terminal access to collect hardware information.
Cisco PXM-1 Cards - No SSH support
◆ Issue: No SSH support for Cisco PXM-1 cards.
◆ Resolution: The Cisco PXM-1 cards does not support SSH.
Cisco PXM-1 Cards - Not Responding After saveallcnf Command
◆ Issue: PXM-1 cards can sometimes not respond after a saveallcnf command.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix192
Cisco Devices
◆ Resolution: Device capture operations will not succeed if the device does not respond with the success status of the command.
Cisco RPM Cards - Cards not Reported in Hardware Output
◆ Issue: RPM Cards are not fully reported in the MGX hardware output.
◆ Resolution: RPM cards are reported under the RPM IOS hardware inventory and do not provide dspcd information at the terminal.
Cisco MGX 193
Cisco Devices
Cisco MDS
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discover, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (Including SNMPv3)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• SNMP scalar checks for Cisco enterprise ID
◆ sysServices
• SNMP scalar checks for layer 2 and 3 flags (0x06 value)
◆ sysDescription
• Checks for SAN-OS
Switch
9124, 9134, 9216, 9216A, 9216i, 9509, 9513
http://www.cisco.com
Yes
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
SNMP, Account
San-OS 3.0, 3.2, 3.3
Telnet, SSH
Telnet, SSH
Terminal
Ping, Trace Route, ARP, Interface, VLANs, CDP Neighbors
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, Software Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix194
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Terminal:
• show running-config
• show startup-config
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Configuration commands are issued interactively to the device
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
enable
configure terminal
show running-config
show startup-config
terminal length
ping
traceroute
show arp
show interface brief
show logging
show system resources
◆ Password Management
[no] snmp-server community
[no] snmp-server user securityName (auth authProto authPhase (priv privProtocol privPhrse))
username
Cisco MDS 195
Cisco Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known Issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco MDS
◆ If the device is upgraded to run NX-OS, it will not appear as a Cisco Nexus device class until it is re-discovered. It is not necessary to drop the device, but pre-Nexus config pushes may fail, depending on the content.
running
startup
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix196
Cisco Devices
Cisco Wide Area Application Services
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
(WAAS)
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Switch
512, 612, 674, 7371
www.cisco.com
Yes
Syslog
ASCII
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH, SSH/TFTP, Tenlet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
Account, Privilege Mode, SNMPv1/2
4.8.0-12
Telnet, SSH, SSH/TFTP, Tenlet/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, SSH/TFTP, Tenlet/TFTP
Telnet, SSH
View Routes, View ARP, Ping, TraceRoute, Resync, View CDP Neighbors
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, OS Version, Inventory
Cisco Wide Area Application Services (WAAS) 197
Cisco Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysDescr value must contain Wide Area Application Services
• Model name is obtained from the following oids (in order):
– 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.368.1.34.3.0– 1.3.6.1.4.1.2467.1.34.3.0– Part number column of the CISCO-ENTITY-ASSET-MIB for the chassis
entry◆ For Terminal:
• Show version output must contain Wide Area Application Services
• sysObjectId value is mapped from the model name which is parsed from the output of show hardware for a non-blank field, in the following order:
– ModelNum (raw)– ModelNum, where (text) optionally precedes the model name– ExtModel
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show startup-config for startup configuration
◆ show running-config for running configuration
◆ For Telnet/TFTP use the following commands:
• copy startup-config tftp serverAddress localFilename
• copy running-config tftp serverAddress localFilename
Configuration deployThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ From the console prompts the device is brought to the enable mode using enable.
• Device paging is disabled using the no terminal more or terminal length 0 command.
• The configuration is entered line by line after the device is placed into configuration mode using configure terminal.
◆ For Telnet/TFTP user the following command:
• copy tftp <serverAddress> < localFilename> startup-config
◆ To copy run to start from the command line:
• copy running-config startup-config
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix198
Cisco Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Running
Startup
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Cisco Wide Area Application Services (WAAS) 199
Cisco Devices
Cisco Wireless LAN Controller
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, MAC and OS version using SNMP or the command line interface.
◆ Filesystem and Memory using the command line interface.
◆ Interface table using SNMP or the command line interface.
Cisco Wireless LAN Controller
2100 series, 4400 series
www.cisco.com
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
running, readable
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
4.0
Running by means of TFTPReadable by means of Terminal
Running by means of TFTP
Terminal
View Routes, View ARP, Ping, Resync, Clear counters, Show diag, ship interface brief
Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix200
Cisco Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Readable config is captured from a terminal session using the show run-config command
◆ Running config is retrieved using the devices transfer upload command.
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Configlets are pushed to the device by opening a command line interface session, entering configuration mode, and sending the content line-by-line.
◆ Running config is pushed using the devices transfer download command.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Running
Readable
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
Cisco Wireless LAN Controller 201
Cisco Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Cisco Wireless LAN Controller
◆ The Cisco Wireless LAN Controller does not have a readable configuration. The running config is either binary or xml, depending on the operating system version. A running config can be pushed back to the device for rollback. Incremental changes can be pushed using the configlet mechanism.
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix202
17
Citrix Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Citrix Netscaler LoadBalancer................................................................................... 204
Citrix Devices 203
Citrix Devices
Citrix Netscaler LoadBalancer
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs: 1.3.6.1.4.1.5951.1.*
◆ OS version in sysDescr at least v6.0
◆ Interface table from MIB-2
Citrix Netscaler LoadBalancer
7000, 9000, 10000, 12000
http://www.citrix.com/
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Multiple Text and Binary
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/SCP, SSH, Telnet
CLI, SNMP
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
6.0 or greater
SSH/SCP, SSH, Telnet
SSH/SCP, SSH, Telnet
Terminal
Ping, Resync
For SNMP: Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix204
Citrix Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH/SCP:
• SCP /flash/nsconfig/ns.conf to device server
• SCP is only used for the start configuration
◆ For SSH and telnet capture output from the following commands:
• show ns runningconfig (for running configuration)
• show ns ns.conf (for start configuration)
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH/SCP (used for start configuration):
• SCP config file to /tmp/ns.conf
• cp /tmp/ns.conf /flash/nsconfig/ns.conf
• chmod 0644 /flash/nsconfig/ns.conf
◆ For SSH and telnet (used for running configuration):
• The device is brought to a shell prompt and the configuration is entered line by line with checks for invalid input.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running --
startup --
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Citrix Netscaler LoadBalancer 205
Citrix Devices
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix206
18
D-Link Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ D-Link xStack............................................................................................................... 208
D-Link Devices 207
D-Link Devices
D-Link xStack
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Switch Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-band, SNMP)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• Contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.64.2
Configuration captureThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH:
• show config current_config
• show config config_in_nvram
Switch
3550
ftp://ftp.dlink.com/Switch/des3550/Manual/
No
Single ASCII
Config, Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
SSH, Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-band, SNMP
4.01
SSH, Telnet
SSH, Telnet
Terminal
View Interfaces, View ARP, View Routes, Ping
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix208
D-Link Devices
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH:
• Commands are issued to the command line interface.
• Results are scanned for errors.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
D-Link xStack 209
D-Link Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
D-Link xStack
◆ No volatile or non-volatile storage information is available using SNMP, for this device class.
◆ User accounts are defined at administrator level.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix210
19
Edgewater Devices
This chapter contains the following topic.
◆ Edgewater EdgeMarc Router .................................................................................... 212
Edgewater Devices 211
Edgewater Devices
Edgewater EdgeMarc Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs: 1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.3.2.10.* or 1.3.6.1.4.1.19139.*
◆ Compiler Options at OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.2021.100.6.0
◆ Interface table from MIB-2
Edgewater EdgeMarc Router
4200, 4300T, 4500, 5300, 6400
http://www.edgewaternetworks.com/
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
CLI, SNMP Only
SNMP, Terminal
Enable, In-Band
SSH/Terminal, TFTP
SSH/Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
View Routes, View ARP, Ping, TraceRoute, Reboot, View Interfaces
For SNMP: Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix212
Edgewater Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP use the following commands:
• ewn save [temp_filename]
• tftp -p -l /etc/config/[temp_filename] -r [temp_filename] [device_server_ip]
◆ For SSH and Telnet capture output from the following commands:
• ewn save [temp_filename]
• cat /etc/config/[temp_filename]
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP use the following commands:
• tftp -g -l /etc/config/[temp_filename] -r [temp_filename] [device_server_ip]
• ewn load [temp_filename]
◆ For SSH and Telnet deployment of the configuration, the device is brought to a shell prompt and the configuration is entered line-by-line with checks for invalid input.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Edgewater EdgeMarc Router 213
Edgewater Devices
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix214
20
Enterasys Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Enterasys Smartswitch Router .................................................................................. 216
Enterasys Devices 215
Enterasys Devices
Enterasys Smartswitch Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Operating System
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Autoo Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (Syslog, SNMP Trap)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysDescr contains Enterasys
• sysObjectID value contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.5624
Router
XP 2400
http://secure.enterasys.com/support/manuals/
No
E10.0.0.3A
SysLog, Trap
Single ASCII
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet Only, SSH Only, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band
Telnet Only, SSH Only, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet only, SSH only, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Standard
Serial Number, OS Version, Memory, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix216
Enterasys Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• Running:
– system show active • Startup:
– system show startup◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• Running:
– copy active to tftp://ipAddress/remoteFilename • Startup:
– copy active to tftp://ipAddress/remoteFilename
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• The device is placed in configure mode and commands are issued interactively from the command line interface.
• The results are scanned for errors. If no errors are found, the scratchpad configuration is copied to the active or startup configuration, depending on the push type.
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• Running:
– copy tftp://ipAddress/remoteFilename to scratchpad– copy scratchpad to active
• Startup:
– copy tftp://ipAddress/remoteFilename to active
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
cli set command completion off
cli terminal monitor off
cli set terminal rows 0
system show active
system show startup
copy scratchpad to active
Enterasys Smartswitch Router 217
Enterasys Devices
copy scratchpad to startup
enable
exit
copy active to startup
configure
reboot
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
startup
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix218
Enterasys Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Enterasys SSR
◆ Credential management is not supported.
◆ Comment characters are not ignored by the device class and are skipped when the configuration is pushed using Telnet or SSH.
◆ The presence of the last modified comment is used to distinguish full configurations from configlets.
Enterasys Smartswitch Router 219
Enterasys Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix220
21
Ericsson Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Ericsson ECN Switch .................................................................................................. 222◆ Ericsson MSED ............................................................................................................ 225
Ericsson Devices 221
Ericsson Devices
Ericsson ECN Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, and Operating System version using SNMP or command line interface.
◆ File Systems using command line interface.
◆ Interface table using SNMP or command line interface.
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ From a command line interface session, the output of show running-config or show startup-config is captured as the running or startup configuration.
Ethernet Switch
320, 330
www.ericsson.com
Yes
Running, Startup
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH, Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP and Terminal
1.2
SSH, Telnet
SSH, Telnet
Terminal
Ping, View ARP, View Routes, View Interfaces, Resync
Hardware Inventory (SNMP Only), File Systems, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix222
Ericsson Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ A stored configuration is pushed to the systems running config by opening a command line interface session, entering configuration mode, and sending the config line-by-line to the command line interface session.
◆ After pushing a running configuration, the configuration can optionally be copied to the startup configuration by issuing the command line interface command copy running-config startup-config.
◆ After pushing a running configuration, the system can optionally be restarted by issuing the command line interface command reload.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Running
Startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
Ericsson ECN Switch 223
Ericsson Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Ericsson ECN Switch
◆ Ericsson ECN configs cannot be re-entered at a config prompt, because they do not properly exit from sub-config modes. This driver will attempt to send an exit command anytime the config parser receives a comment line in the configuration while the system is at a sub-config prompt.
◆ On some Ericsson ECN models, the output of show running-config or show startup-config is not a valid config, in that it cannot be re-entered at a config prompt without causing %invalid input errors. Invalid configurations will cause push jobs to fail, and the offending lines must be edited out before sending the configuration to the device.
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix224
Ericsson Devices
Ericsson MSED
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (SNMP)
◆ Configuration Capture (Pull running configs)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configlets, TERMlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Discovery Mechanism:
• Look for Ericsson MSED in sysDescr
◆ Model from sysDescr
◆ Operating System from show system info output
◆ Serial Number from show system info output
Router/Edge Device
MSED/HL950
www.ericsson.com
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Binary Running Config, Text Running Config
ARP, Routes, Interfaces, Identity, System Properties
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
CLI, SNMP
SNMP
In-band
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Ping
Model, Operating System, Serial Number
Ericsson MSED 225
Ericsson Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ config export /[TEXT_FILENAME]
◆ config backup /[BINARY_FILENAME]
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For push to start:
• config restore [BINARY_FILENAME]
◆ For push to run:
• The text version of the configuration is entered line by line at a CLI prompt
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix226
Ericsson Devices
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
Ericsson MSED 227
Ericsson Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix228
22
Extreme Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Extreme ......................................................................................................................... 230◆ ExtremeWare XOS ....................................................................................................... 233
Extreme Devices 229
Extreme Devices
Extreme
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Extreme Switch
Alpine 3802, Alpine 3804, Alpine 3808,Black Diamond 6804, Black Diamond 6800, Black Diamond 6808, Black Diamond 6816, Enet Switch 24 Port,Summit 1, Summit 2, Summit 3, Summit 4, Summit 4fx, Summit 48, Summit 48i Summit 24, Summit 24E3Summit 7iSX, Summit 7iTX, Summit 1iTX, Summit 5i, Summit 1iSX, Summit 5iLX, Summit 5iTX, Summit 48SI, Summit PX1, Summit 24E2TX, Summit 24E2SX
http://www. extremenetworks.com
Yes
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Configlet, Config
Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
OS Upgrade
TFTP, Terminal
TFTP, Terminal
Terminal
TFTP
Ping, TraceRoute
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix230
Extreme Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.2
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Extreme 231
Extreme Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Extreme Summit (Model Summit iTx)
◆ When working with the Extreme Summit device switch, the configuration text lines containing "delete" may cause connectivity loss if used in a Configuration Roll Back. Remove the "delete lines" before the Push to avoid loss of connectivity with the device during a Roll Back, or when using Restore to restore an old revision.
Extreme Device - Configuration not changing after Push
◆ Issue: For Extreme Summit Software Version 6.1.5, configuration changes (pushes) will not take on the device using the SNMP/TFTP mechanism.
◆ Resolution: Ensure you use the Telnet or Telnet/TFTP mechanisms for Extreme Summit configuration pushes.
Config Push using Telnet to Extreme Switch - Unsuccessful
◆ Issue: Pushing an entire configuration to the Extreme Switch should not be executed using Telnet unless disable commands (which can potentially stop the management interface) are removed before pushing the config.
• For example, for a configuration entry such as, disable ipforwarding vlan Default.
– A disable command in the device configuration takes the form disable string (where string may be an interface).
– All disable commands can easily be removed from the device configuration using a text editor.
You can push a full configuration using the SNMP/TFTP mechanism as a work around. Additionally, you can push configlets to the device.
◆ Resolution: Use configlets when making changes to the Extreme Summit with Telnet or SSH.
Note: SNMP/TFTP can be used for configuration pulls; however, changes cannot be the configuration using this mechanism.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix232
Extreme Devices
ExtremeWare XOS
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• OID contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.2
◆ sysDescr
• OID contains ExtremeWare XOS
Configuration captureThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ tftp ipAddress -p -l localFilename -r remoteFilename
Switch
BlackDiamond 10808, 12804
www.extremenetworks.com
No
Single XML
Config, Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
SSH, Telnet, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
SNMP, Account
11.3.4.5
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Memory, Interfaces, Serial number, OS version, Inventory
ExtremeWare XOS 233
Extreme Devices
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ tftp ipAddress -g -l localFilename -r remoteFilename
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
startup
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix234
Extreme Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
ExtremeWare XOS
◆ Configuration management is not supported if TFTP is not enabled for the device class.
◆ Configuration pushes have not been certified.
ExtremeWare XOS 235
Extreme Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix236
23
F5 Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ F5 Load Balancer Rev 3 .............................................................................................. 238◆ F5 Load Balancer Rev 4 .............................................................................................. 242◆ F5 Load Balancer Rev 9 .............................................................................................. 245
F5 Devices 237
F5 Devices
F5 Load Balancer Rev 3
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming, multi config)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.3375.1.1
Load Balancer
Big-IP-HA, Big-IP-LB, Big-IP-3-DNS, Big-IP-FLB, Big-IP-CLB, Big-IP-XLB, Big-IP-SSL
www.askf5.com (registration required)
Yes
Syslog, Trap
Multiple Complex (Linux based)
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, Configlet
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP, SSH/SCP
CLI
SNMP
Telnet, SSH
3.x
Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP, SSH/SCP
Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP, SSH/SCP
Terminal
Test Credentials, Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View Arp, View Interfaces, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup, Clear Cache
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix238
F5 Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ The configuration file units in the package/pkgxml/F5_30/F5_R9.xml file are retrieved using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are pushed using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ The configuration file units in the package/pkgxml/F5_9x/F5_R9.xml file are transferred using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are retrieved using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
df
mount
ls
ifconfig
ping
traceroute
arp
netstat
◆ File Management
cd
cp
md5sum
◆ Password Management
grep
passwd
cat
bigstart restart snmpd
F5 Load Balancer Rev 3 239
240
F5 D
evicesMulti-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/ pull Pull only Type Editable Required
/etc/bigip.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/bigd.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/ipfw.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/bigip.license Text Yes Yes
/etc/routes Text Yes Yes
/etc/bigconfig/openssl.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/bigconfig/users Text Yes Yes
/etc/bigconf.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/passwd Text Yes Yes
/etc/hosts Text Yes Yes
/etc/hosts.allow Text Yes Yes
/etc/rateclass.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/ipfwrate.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/snmpd.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/snmptrap.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/sshd_config Text Yes Yes
/etc/ssh_config Text Yes Yes
/etc/ssh_host_dsa_key Text Yes Yes
/etc/ssh_host_dsa_key.pub Text Yes Yes
/etc/ssh_host_key.pub Text Yes Yes
/etc/ssh_host_key Binary Yes
/etc/user.db Binary Yes
/etc/ipfw.filt Binary Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix
F5 Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
F5 Load Balancer Rev 3 241
F5 Devices
F5 Load Balancer Rev 4
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.3375.1.1
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are pushed using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
F5
BigIP HA, BigIP LB, BigIP 3-DNS, BigIP FLB, BigIP CLB, BigIP XLB, BigIP SSL
http://www.f5.com
Yes
Syslog, Traps
Multiple Text, Multiple/Complex
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, Configlet
SSH/SCP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band
SSH/SCP, Telnet/FTP
SSH/SCP, Telnet/FTP
Terminal
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix242
F5 Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ SCP or FTP is used to put the pulled files back into place.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are retrieved using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/ pull Pull only Type Editable Required
/config/bigip.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip_base.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/ipfw.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip.license Text Yes Yes
/config/routes Text Yes Yes
/config/bigconfig/openssl.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/bigconfig/users Text Yes Yes
/etc/bigconf.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/passwd Text Yes Yes
/etc/hosts Text Yes Yes
/etc/hosts.allow Text Yes Yes
/etc/rateclass.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/ipfwrate.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/snmpd.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/snmptrap.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/sshd_config Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/ssh_config Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key.pub Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/ssh_host_key.pub Text Yes Yes
F5 Load Balancer Rev 4 243
F5 Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
/config/ssh/ssh_host_key Binary Yes
/config/user.db Binary Yes
/config/ipfw.filt Binary Yes
Multi-config files Push/ pull Pull only Type Editable Required
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix244
F5 Devices
F5 Load Balancer Rev 9
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Credentials Management (Change or Roll passwords and SNMP Communities)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Load Balancer
BIG-IP 1500, BIG-IP 3400
www.askf5.com (registration required)
Yes
Syslog, Traps
Multiple Complex (Linux based)
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, Configlet
SSH, SSH/SCP
Command Line
SNMP, Terminal
1st Level ID, SNMP Read-Only, SNMP Read-Write, Terminal Only, SSH, Telnet
Operating systems for BIG-IP 1500 models: 9.1.2.40.6, 9.2.0.167.4, 9.2.4.13.1, 9.4.0.517.5Operating systems for all other models: 9.1.2 40.2
Non-SNMP
SCP
SNMP, SSH
SSH/FTP
View Interfaces, View Routes, View ARP, View Diagnostic, Resync, diffRunStart
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Device Inventory
F5 Load Balancer Rev 9 245
F5 Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Standard MIB II System Values
• System Description .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 = STRING: Linux f5version9.powerupnetworks.com 2.4.21-9.1.2.37.0smp #2 SMP Tue Apr 25 15:38:38 PDT 2006 i686
• System Object ID .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.3375.2.1.3.4.4
• System Contact .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0 = STRING: Richardson
◆ Custom or Vendor Specific OIDs
• Model Name .1.3.6.1.4.1.3375.2.1.3.3.1.0 = STRING: "C36"
• Model Number .1.3.6.1.4.1.3375.2.1.3.3.2.0 = STRING: "1500"
◆ For SNMP:
• sysObjectID
– 1.3.6.1.4.1.3375.2.1.3.4◆ For Terminal:
• OS version is checked using bigpipe version
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device (enable/privileged mode required).
◆ The configuration files in the package/pkgxml/F5_9x/F5_R9.xml file are pulled using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are pushed using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Configuration deployThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ The configuration files in the package/pkgxml/F5_9x/F5_R9.xml file are pushed using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are retrieved using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
df
mount
ls
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix246
F5 Devices
ifconfig
ping
traceroute
apr
netstat
im
local-install
◆ File Management
cd
cp
md5sum
◆ Password Management
grep
passwd
cat
bigstart restart snmpd
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/ pull Pull only Type Editable Required
/config/bigip.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/adjtime Text Yes Yes
/etc/host.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/hosts.allow Text Yes Yes
/etc/hosts.deny Text Yes Yes
/etc/libuser.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/nsswitch.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/passwd Text Yes Yes
/etc/pwdb.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/resolv.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/shadow Text Yes Yes
/etc/sysctl.conf Text Yes Yes
F5 Load Balancer Rev 9 247
F5 Devices
/etc/security/time.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/security/pam_env.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/security/limits.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/security/group.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/security/console.perms Text Yes Yes
/etc/security/chroot.conf Text Yes Yes
/etc/security/access.conf Text Yes Yes
/var/named/config/named.conf Text Yes Yes
/var/named/config/rndc.key Text Yes Yes
/config/ucs_version Text Yes Yes
/config/ssl/ssl.crt/default.crt Text Yes Yes
/config/ssl/ssl.crt/ca-bundle.crt Text Yes Yes
/config/ssl/ssl.csr/default.csr Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/ldap/system-auth.conf
Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/local/system-auth
Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/radius/system-auth.conf
Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/other Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/su Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/login Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/httpd Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/sshd Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/pam.d/passwd Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/localusers Text Yes Yes
/config/bigip/auth/userroles Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/ssh_config Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/moduli Text Yes Yes
/config/ssh/sshd_config Text Yes Yes
Multi-config files Push/ pull Pull only Type Editable Required
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix248
F5 Devices
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
/config/httpd/conf.d/mod_auth_pam.conf
Text Yes Yes
/config/httpd/conf/workers2.properties
Text Yes Yes
/config/net-snmp/snmpd.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/snmp/subagents.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/snmp/snmpd.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/big3d/big3d.crt Text Yes Yes
/config/big3d/big3d.key Text Yes Yes
/config/big3d/big3d.pem Text Yes Yes
/config/big3d/big3d.req Text Yes Yes
/config/lcd/portinfo.txt Text Yes Yes
/config/lcd/lcdinfo.txt Text Yes Yes
/config/lcd/ledinfo.txt Text Yes Yes
/config/lcd/menus Text Yes Yes
/config/lcd/serialinfo.txt Text Yes Yes
/config/lcd/screens Text Yes Yes
/config/ntp.conf Text Yes Yes
/config/eventd.xml Text Yes Yes
/config/RegKey.license Text Yes Yes
Multi-config files Push/ pull Pull only Type Editable Required
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
F5 Load Balancer Rev 9 249
F5 Devices
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix250
24
Force10 Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Force10 C-Series Router ............................................................................................. 252◆ Force10 E-Series Router.............................................................................................. 255◆ Force10 S-Series Router .............................................................................................. 258
Force10 Devices 251
Force10 Devices
Force10 C-Series Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Credential Roll (In-Band)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number and Operating System version using SNMP or command line interface
◆ Filesystem and Memory using command line interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or command line interface
Force10 C-Series Router
C150, C300
http://www.force10networks.com/
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Startup, Running
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
FTOS v7.9
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, Resync
Chassis, Card, Port, FanTray, Power, Processor, RPMs, SFModules
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix252
Force10 Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet:
• show run or show start command is issued in the command line interface, and the file captured directly from the command line interface output.
◆ For SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP
• The command copy start-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] or copy running-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] is issued in the command line interface to transfer the file to the VoyenceControl device server.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet:
• The command copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] start-config or copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] running-config are used to transfer the file directly into the device's filesystem.
◆ For SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP
• The command copy start-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] or copy running-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] is issued in the command line interface to transfer the file to the VoyenceControl device server.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Startup
Running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Force10 C-Series Router 253
Force10 Devices
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix254
Force10 Devices
Force10 E-Series Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs: 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.1.*
◆ SysDescription Contains Force10 Networks Real Time Operating System Software
◆ Force10 Enterprise MIB (1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.*)
Force10 E-Series Router
E150, E300, E600, E610, E1200
http://www.force10networks.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
FTOS, SNMP Only
SNMP, Terminal
Enable, In-Band
SSH/Terminal, TFTP
SSH/Terminal, TFTP
View Routes, View ARP, Ping, TraceRoute, Resync, View Interfaces
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Filesystem, Interfaces, Serial Number
Force10 E-Series Router 255
Force10 Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• copy running-config tftp:// [device_server_ip]/[temp_filename]
• copy startup-config tftp:// [device_server_ip]/[temp_filename]
◆ For SSH and Telnet:
• show run
• show start
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• copy tftp:// [device_server_ip]/[temp_filename] running-config
• copy tftp:// [device_server_ip]/[temp_filename] startup-config
◆ For SSH and Telnet deployment of the running configuration, the device is brought to the enable mode and then to configure mode, after which the configuration is entered line-by-line with checks for invalid input.
◆ The device does not support entry of a startup configuration directly from a command shell, so the driver will attempt to fallback to one of the TFTP methods listed above.
◆ To copy run to start (synchronize) the following command is executed from a shell prompt in enable mode:
• Copy running-config startup-config
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix256
Force10 Devices
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Force10 E-Series Router 257
Force10 Devices
Force10 S-Series Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations)
◆ Credential Roll (In-Band)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, serial number, and operating system version using SNMP or command-line interface.
Force10 S-Series Router
S2410CP, S2410P,S25, S25V, S25N, S25P-AC,S50, S50E, S50V, S50N-AC, S50N-DC, S50P-DC
http://www.force10networks.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Startup, Running
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
FTOS v7.9
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, Resync
Chassis, Card, Port, FanTray, Power, Processor, RPMs, SFModules
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix258
Force10 Devices
◆ Filesystem and Memory using command-line interface.
◆ Interface table using SNMP or command-line interface.
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet:
• show run or show start command is issued in the command-line interface, and the file captured directly from the command-line interface output.
◆ For SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP:
• The command copy startup-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] or copy running-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the file to the device server.
◆ For SSH/FTP or Telnet/FTP:
• The config is copied to the filesystem using copy startup-config [filename] or copy running-config [filename] and [filename] is then transferred to the device server using the router’s internal FTP server.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet:
• A command-line interface session is started in config mode, and the config is entered line-by-line while monitoring responses for error messages.
◆ For SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP:
• The command copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] startup-config or copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] running-config is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the config to the device from the device server.
◆ For SSH/FTP or Telnet/FTP:
• The config is copied to [filename] in the filesystem using FTP, then from a command-line interface prompt the command copy [filename] startup-config or copy [filename] running-config is entered.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
startup
Force10 S-Series Router 259
Force10 Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix260
25
Fortinet Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Fortinet Fortigate Router............................................................................................ 262
Fortinet Devices 261
Fortinet Devices
Fortinet Fortigate Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configuration)
◆ Credential Roll
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, serial number and operating system version via SNMP or command-line interface.
◆ Memory via command-line interface.
◆ Interface table via SNMP or command-line interface.
Fortinet Fortigate
300A
http://www.fortinet.com
Yes
SNMP trap, syslog
Running
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
4.0.3
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, View Interfaces, exec_cfg_save
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix262
Fortinet Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ SSH or Telnet:
• show full-configuration
– The command is issued in the command-line interface.– The file is captured directly from the command-line interface output.
◆ SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP
• execute backup full-config tftp [filename] [serverip]
– The command is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the file to the device server.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ SSH or Telnet:
• A command-line interface session is started in config mode.
• The config is entered line by line while monitoring responses for error messages.
◆ SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP
• execute restore config tftp [filename] [serverip]
– The command is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the config to the device from the device server.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
running
Fortinet Fortigate Router 263
Fortinet Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Fortinet Fortigate Router
◆ This driver was built using a model 300A appliance. Fortinet indicates that it should work with most Fortigate models (as of 9/2009).
Access Control Lists No
ARP Table Yes
CAM Table No
Device Identity Yes
File System Information No
Hardware Information No
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Static Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLANs No
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix264
26
Foundry Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Foundry EdgeIron....................................................................................................... 266◆ Foundry Package......................................................................................................... 269
Foundry Devices 265
Foundry Devices
Foundry EdgeIron
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Management (Revision Configuration, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band, SNMP)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectId value contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.5.1.1.4.5.1
◆ sysDescr value contains EdgeIron
Switch
EdgeIron 48G
www.foundrynetworks.com
No
ASCII
Config, Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
2.2.7.29
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, View Interfaces
Interfaces, Serial Number, Software Version, Hardware Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix266
Foundry Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show running-config
◆ show startup-config
◆ copy running-config tftp
◆ copy startup-config-tftp
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
running
Access Control Lists No
ARP Table No
CAM Table No
Device Identity Yes
File System Information No
Hardware Information Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLANs No
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
Foundry EdgeIron 267
Foundry Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Foundry EdgeIron Switch
◆ No volatile or non-volatile storage information is available using SNMP, for this device class.
◆ Configuration pushes are not supported, and can crash the device used for development. The following behavior persists through firmware upgrades:
• When pushing commands using the command line interface, the device locks after a number of Invalid Syntax messages, due to a lack of exit commands (VLAN, Interface, and similar commands) for ASCII configurations.
• For TFTP, transfer is reported as successful, but the device fails to respond to any communication protocols.
• Comment characters, such as !, in the configuration cause warnings when issued using the command line interface.
• Certain configuration commands do not merge, and issue Failed to set warnings.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix268
Foundry Devices
Foundry Package
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Config)
◆ Configuration Updates (Push Configlet, TERMlets Merges)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Credentials Management (Change or Roll passwords and SNMP Communities)
Discovery/identify deviceThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectID
• Layer 3 device
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991
Foundry Router
BigIron 4000, BigIron RX-4 Router,FastIron 400, FastIron 15000, FastIron 800, FastIron SuperX-PREM, FastIron SX 1600-PREM,IronWare,NetIron MLX Router, NetIron MLX Router, ServerIron
www.foundrynetworks.com
Yes
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Configlet
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
IOS like, Command-Line Interface
SNMP
Enable, In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
ping
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
Foundry Package 269
Foundry Devices
◆ SysDescription contains Foundry Networks
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• copy running-config tftp ipAddress remoteFilename
• copy startup-config tftp ipAddress remoteFilename
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• skip-page
• show run or show configuration
◆ For SNMP/TFTP:
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.5.0: ipAddress
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.8.0: remoteFilename
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.9.0: 20 (start config) or 22 (run config)
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• copy tftp running-config ipAddress remoteFilename
• copy tftp startup-config ipAddress remoteFilename
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• enable
• configure terminal
• commands are entered line-by-line
◆ For SNMP/TFTP:
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.5.0: ipAddress
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.8.0: remoteFilename
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.9.0: 21 (start config) or 23 (run config)
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
configure terminal
copy run
copy start
disable
enable
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix270
Foundry Devices
page
ping
reload
show configuration
show run
skip-page
username
write memory
◆ File Management
tftp
copy tftp
◆ Password Management
[no] enable super-user-password
[no] snmp-server community
[no] username oldUser
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
Foundry Package 271
Foundry Devices
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix272
27
Gigamon Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Gigamon Switch .......................................................................................................... 274
Gigamon Devices 273
Gigamon Devices
Gigamon Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Operating System
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Management (Revision Configuration, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Credential Management
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysObjectID must contain 1.3.6.1.4.1.26866.
• Model must map to sysObjectID in GigamonModels.xml.
• Hostname, device properties, and interfaces must be successfully retrieved or discovery is aborted.
◆ For Terminal:
• System properties must be parsed successfully from the output of show SNMPsystem.
Switch
GigaVUE-MP
-
No
5.0.17
ASCII, Binary
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, Command, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, Telnet, SSH
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, Telnet, SSH
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, View Interfaces
Serial Number, Model, Interfaces, Inventory (Terminal Only)
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix274
Gigamon Devices
• Hostname, device properties, and interfaces must be successfully retrieved or discovery is aborted.
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Text:
• report running:
– config save filename– show file filename– delete filename
• report startup:
– file show (entry with nb flag is identified)– show file filename
◆ Binary:
• running:
– config save filename– upload –cfg filename– delete filename
• startup:
– file show (entry with nb flag is identified)– upload –cfg filename
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ running:
• install –cfg filename
• config restore filename (prompt to apply: y, prompt to set nb: n)
◆ startup:
• install –cfg filename
• config file filename nb
Gigamon Switch 275
Gigamon Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
report running
report startup
running
startup
Access Control Lists No
ARP Table No
CAM Table No
Device Identity Yes
File System Information No
Hardware Information Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLANs No
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix276
Gigamon Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Gigamon Switch
◆ The following hardware information is not reported by the device; memory and file system information are disabled in the device package:
• Memory
• File system information
• Inventory (SNMP)
• IP addresses (SNMP)
◆ The model name is obtained from the device banner. If the banner is customized, this may prevent mapping to a sysObjectID value in the GigamonModels.xml, and fail device discovery via terminal protocols.
◆ If the device is completely unmanaged and later rediscovered, the startup file set for the current management instance will change. The previous file must be deleted manually after a successful push to startup following rediscovery, since the Device ID (which is part of the filename) will have changed. This approach is required due to the lack of vendor support for specifying the source and destination filenames for the install –cfg command.
◆ Configlets and remediation are not supported by this device class, since the text representation of the configuration cannot be pushed to the device, which is a preprequisite for configlet pushes.
◆ The managed device model(s) appear to only support a single read-only community string.
◆ The show diag command has been observed to disconnect communication sessions with the device after partial output. As a result, some diagnostic information that may assist with resolving missing hardware information is currently unavailable to the driver.
Gigamon Switch 277
Gigamon Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix278
28
HP Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ HP ProCurve Switch................................................................................................... 280
HP Devices 279
HP Devices
HP ProCurve Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Operating System
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Hardware Information
HP ProCurve Switch
J3245A ProCurve Switch 800T, J3245A ProCurve Switch 200, J4850A ProCurve Switch 5304XL, J3288A ProCurve 10/100 Hub 12M, J4865A ProCurve Switch 4108GL,J3245A ProCurve Switch 212M, J3299A, J4899A ProCurve Switch 4874A, J4899A ProCurve Switch 2650,J4120A ProCurve Switch 1600M, J4122A ProCurve Switch 2400M,J4093A ProCurve Switch 2424M, J4812A ProCurve Switch 2512, J4813A. J4899B ProCurve Switch 2650, J4900 ProCurve Switch 2626, ProCurve Switch Unknown, ProCurve Switch 2000, ProCurve Switch 2000B, ProCurve Switch 2524, ProCurve Switch A6713A, ProCurve Switch A6716A, ProCurve Switch A6717A, ProCurve Switch 4104GL, ProCurve Switch 224M, ProCurve Switch J4902, ProCurve Switch J4903A, ProCurve Switch J4904A, ProCurve Switch Proliant, ProCurve Switch J4900A, ProCurve Switch J8165A, ProCurve Switch J8164A, ProCurve Switch J8130A, ProCurve Switch J8133A, ProCurve Switch J8153A, ProCurve Switch J8154A, ProCurve Switch J8155A, ProCurve Switch J4905A, ProCurve Switch J4906A, ProCurve Switch J8718A, ProCurve Switch J8719A, ProCurve Switch J8433A, ProCurve Switch J8474A, 9308 Routing Switch, 9304 Routing Switch, 5308 Routing Switch, 6208 Routing Switch,5308XL ProCurve Switch HP Ether Switch
-
Yes
Operating systems for 2600 series models: H.10.31, H.10.35, H.10.43Operating systems for 3500-YLseries models: K.11.69, K.12.02, K.12.05Operating systems for 5300-XL series models: E.10.55, E.10.61
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet
Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, SSH, SCP
Terminal, SSH, TFTP, SCP
Terminal
FTP, TFTP, SCP
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix280
HP Devices
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.11.2.3.7.11
◆ SysDescription
• Contains ProCurve
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show run
◆ show config
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ TFTP to Start (Device Reboots)
• copy tftp startup-config
◆ Term
• Send one config line at a time
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
banner
boot system flash destFlash
configure terminal
no page
show config
show flash
HP ProCurve Switch 281
HP Devices
show running
show ver
show version
terminal width
write memory
reload
ping
traceroute
◆ File Management
copy tftp
◆ Password Management
password
[no] snmp-server community
[no] snmpv3 group
[no] snmpv3 user
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists Yes
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys Yes
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix282
HP Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
HP ProCurve 2650 - Invalid Command ip proxy-arp
◆ The configuration command for the default VLAN does not process correctly. This is an issue for all push types. A Push, using the terminal protocol, provides a warning but cannot be used for Push to Start.
This error has been ignored for pushes to the running configuration but can not be ignored for a Push to Start, using TFTP.
• HP 2650# sh ver
Image stamp: /sw/code/build/fish(ts_08_5)
May 26 2005 17:11:52
H.08.69
973
Boot Image: Primary
VLAN 1
name "DEFAULT_VLAN" untagged 1-47,50-Trk1 ip address 172.18.1.1 255.255.255.0 ip proxy-arp exit
Failed during execution
Line=exit
Error In Configuration File On Line #21
Invalid input: proxy-arp
Error: Push Failed, Pull Succeeded
HP 2650# copy start tftp 192.168.1.1 hp1
HP 2650# copy tftp start 192.168.1.1 hp1
OSPF Settings Yes
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
Attributed data Support
HP ProCurve Switch 283
HP Devices
Device may be rebooted, do you want to continue [y/n]? y
line: 22. Invalid input: proxy-arp
HP ProCurve 2650 - Push to Start causes Reboot
◆ The device can reboot after a Push to Start.
• HP 2650# copy tftp start 192.168.1.1 hp1
Device may be rebooted, do you want to continue [y/n]? y
Rebooting switch...
The ProCurve 2650 switch may reboot after a Push to Start.
HP ProCurve
◆ The HP Switch does not support Non-SNMP Management. For manageability, ensure that SNMP is turned On.
HP Switch - Configuration Pushes
◆ Issue: Configuration pushes executed to the HP switch using the push types Push to Run and Push to Run Copy Start may fail, due to line entries within the device configuration which contain the delete command.
◆ Resolution: Remove lines from the configuration that may issue delete commands before pushing the configuration.
◆ RollBack
• When pushing a configuration to the HP switch, to remove lines from the configuration, that line must be prefixed with the word no.
• For example:
ip default-gateway 172.17.0.1
snmp-server community "public" Operator Unrestricted
snmp-server community "Cust3"
• To remove "public" you need to push the following:
ip default-gateway 172.17.0.1
no snmp-server community "public" Operator Unrestricted
snmp-server community "Cust3"
Note that the second line snmp-server community "public", Operator Unrestricted is removed by prefixing the line with no, and then pushing the configuration. For lines which contain delete, follow the same procedure.
HP ProCurve 2626 and 3500-ly
◆ Configuration management using SCP
• This capability is OS-dependent. Consult the applicable device documentation for details. For certain versions, SFTP (currently unsupported) is available, but SCP is not.
◆ OS Upgrades using SCP
• Image transfers generally succeed, but the devices fail to acknowledge the end-of-file sequence, leaving subsequent terminal sessions unable to complete the reload procedure. This can take the form of unresponsive SSH sessions or an indication that a transfer is still in progress. In some cases, the image file may also be truncated. A cold boot is the only current workaround.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix284
29
HUAWEI Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ SmartAX ....................................................................................................................... 286
HUAWEI Devices 285
HUAWEI Devices
SmartAX
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Operating System
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Management (revision config, basic diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model OS version and Hostname using command line interface
◆ File Systems using command line interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or command line interface
Switch
MA5300
www.huawei.com
V3R000M03
Running, Startup
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, Show Routes, Show Interfaces, Show ARP
Identity, Model, Software Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix286
HUAWEI Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• running: show running-config
• startup: show startup-config'
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• startup: tftp put flash:/vrpcfg.txt //remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For Telnet and SSH:
• running: full configuration push is not supported (see Known Issues), but configlets are
◆ For Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• startup: tftp get //remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename flash:/vrpcfg.txt
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
enable
disable
terminal length 0
configure terminal
write
show running-config
show startup-config
tftp put flash:/vrpcfg.txt //remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename
tftp get //remoteIpAddress/remoteFilename flash:/vrpcfg.txt
show version
ping
tracert
show ip interface
show arp all
show ip route static
reboot system
SmartAX 287
HUAWEI Devices
◆ Password Management
snmp-server community secret type [ro|rw]
no snmp-server community secret
terminal user password
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Running
Startup
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information No
Static Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix288
HUAWEI Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Huawei SmartAX
◆ Until a command line interface command is identified to determine the name of the startup configuration file, the literal name vrpcfg.txt is currently used in the driver. This will result in startup file management errors in the event Huawei changes the name of the startup file in later software releases.
◆ There does not appear to be a way to query the system for serial number or memory information.
◆ Full configuration pushes using terminal are not supported due to the content of the configuration not merging correctly from the command line interface when issued line-by-line. Some commands result in sub-levels of config prompts without corresponding exit commands, and the comment character ! does not serve this purpose. This leaves the device in a state where normally legal commands are not recognized, and the resulting errors fail the push.
◆ The concept of privilege mode with password authorization does not exist for this device class, so privilege password jobs are failed with change not supported.
SmartAX 289
HUAWEI Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix290
30
Intermec Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Intermec MobileLAN.................................................................................................. 292
Intermec Devices 291
Intermec Devices
Intermec MobileLAN
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Operating System
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appears in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Credential Management (Change Account Password, SNMP Communities)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• sysDescr value contains Intermec Technologies AP
◆ For Terminal:
• Banner contains Access Point Configuration
• Main menu contains About entry
• Summary screen listing WA2n as model
Wireless Access Point/Bridge
Tested: WA21Untested: WA22
www.intermec.com
2.30
ASCII (see known issues)
Quick Commands, Config
Telnet
Menu driven
SNMP
SNMP, Account
Telnet
Terminal
Standard
Model, Serial Number, Memory, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix292
Intermec Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Maintenance > About This Access Point
• The resulting pages are captured as a read-only information configuration.
◆ The binary configuration of the device cannot currently be retrieved.
• See the Known Issues section for this device, for more information.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
information
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Intermec MobileLAN 293
Intermec Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Intermec MobileLAN
◆ Configlets and termlets are not supported, since the device is menu oriented with almost no command-line interface. The lack of configlets and termlets results in no remediation and diagnostic support.
◆ This device supports only one session at a time. Any session established to the device while a pull or credential roll is attempted, will cause the job to fail with a message referencing the inability to establish a session.
◆ All configuration changes, including credential rolls, require a save and reboot of the device. The current driver does this for each credential roll, as a current limitation.
◆ The TFTP PUT command fails with the message File not found, making file transfer of the binary configuration to the server unworkable. This prevents normal pull/push configuration management.
◆ ARP and Static Routes are only available using SNMP.
◆ Memory and Hardware Inventory are only available using Terminal.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix294
31
Juniper Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Juniper ERX (E Series) ................................................................................................ 296◆ Juniper Router ............................................................................................................. 300◆ Juniper Switch (EX Series) ......................................................................................... 304◆ Juniper EX2500 Switch ............................................................................................... 308
Juniper Devices 295
Juniper Devices
Juniper ERX (E Series)
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Juniper ERX Series
E120, E320, ERX-310, ERX-700, ERX-705, ERX-1400, ERX-1440
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/software/erx/
-
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Binary and Text
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
JunOSe v8.2 and 9.1
Text by means of SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTPBinary by means of SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Text by means of SSH, TelnetBinary by means of SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Terminal
OS Upgrade using FTP
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, View Interfaces, View Processes, View Diagnostic, Show SNMP Delta
Chassis, Slot/Card Inventory, Interfaces, Power, Fans, FileSystems
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix296
Juniper Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, MAC and OS version using SNMP or Command-Line Interface
◆ Filesystem and Memory using the Command-Line Interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or the Command-Line Interface
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Text config:
• show configuration
• show running-configuration
◆ For Binary config
• copy running-configuration
• copy startup-configuration
◆ The system will issue the proper command above, depending on the following.
• If the system is in manual or auto commit mode.
• If a request for the text or binary configuration is made.
◆ For TFTP and FTP protocols:
• The output of the command will be placed in a file in either the root or /outgoing directory.
• The output file is transferred using the appropriate protocol to the device server.
◆ For Telnet or SSH protocols:
• Only the first command is issued.
• The output is captured directly from the command line interface output.
◆ The Binary configuration cannot be pulled using Telnet or SSH alone.
Juniper ERX (E Series) 297
Juniper Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For a Binary configuration:
• The configuration file will be transferred to either the root or /incoming directory using FTP or TFTP.
• The configuration file is either copied or renamed to a unique filename in the root directory and the command boot config [unique filename] is issued from the command line interface.
• The system may optionally be rebooted afterwards.
◆ For a Text configuration:
• The system will start a command line interface session, enter configuration mode, and send the file line-by-line to the command line interface session.
• Committing the configuration or restarting the device is optional, using the configuration input.
Operating System Management
Juniper ERX systems use a rel file for operating system upgrades. The rel file contains a manifest of the additional files that make up the full operating system upgrade. During operating system upgrades the rel file is transferred to the device by the user, and the device selects which additional files are needed to complete the upgrade and automatically transfers them from the same source the rel file came from. Following are the steps for Juniper ERX operating system upgrades:
◆ Retrieve the operating system upgrade file(s) from Juniper. These files are normally distributed as a single zip file.
◆ Unzip the files and place them in a dedicated subdirectory on the operating system repository server. For example in /ERX-10-1-1.
◆ Create an operating system inventory item for the upgrade just as you normally would, with the following two exceptions:
• In Image Name, enter the subdirectory you created above, plus the name of the appropriate rel file for your model. For example, erx_10-1-1.rel, so the Image Name would be ERX-10-1-1/erx_10-1-1.rel.
• For Image Size, do not enter the size of the rel file. Enter the amount of storage that the upgrade will occupy after it is installed on the device. This number can vary depending on the exact model and options that are installed on it. You might have to estimate this number. It is advisable that you over estimate. The update will not proceed if the device does not have at least the above storage space available.
◆ Continue following normal operating system upgrade procedures.
Note: The operating system update files are pulled from the server one by one, resulting in a full operating system update taking two hours or more to complete depending on the speed and latency of the FTP link.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix298
Juniper Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Juniper ERX
◆ The Binary config cannot be pushed or pulled using Telnet or SSH alone.
◆ When entering a Text config using the command line interface, any line that matches the following pattern is not sent, otherwise the command line interface session is dropped.
• no neighbor * rib-out disable
Text
Binary
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Juniper ERX (E Series) 299
Juniper Devices
Juniper Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Operating System Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Juniper Router
A20, A40,J2300, J2320, J2350,J4300, J4320, J4350,J6300, J6350,M10, M10i, M120, M160, M20, M320, M40, M40e, M5, M7i,MX240, MX480, MX960,SRX210, SRX240, SRX3400, SRX3600, SRX5600, SRX5800, SRX650,T320, T640, T1600, TX
http://www.juniper.net/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Formatted Text
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/FTP, SSH/SCP, Telnet/FTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
JunOS Command-line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band Password, SNMP Community
v8+
Supported using FTP or SCP
Terminal, FTP, SCP
Terminal, FTP, SCP
Terminal
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial NumberFor Non-SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix300
Juniper Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• Must contain 1.3.6.1.4.1.2636 or show version output must contain 'JUNOS'
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ set more paging off with set cli screen-length 0
◆ Then do show configuration
◆ For Telnet/FTP or SSH/SCP use the following command:
• Delete file using file delete voyence.cfg
• Enter configuration mode using configure command
• Save a configuration using save voyence.cfg
• Use FTP or SCP to attach and retrieve configuration file voyence.cfg
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
The method used to push a change to the device varies based on the content and protocol, as follows.
Content Mechanism Command Semantics
◆ Unsuccessful pushes will automatically be followed by a 'rollback 0' command.
◆ Successful pushes will, by default, automatically be followed by a commit command. This can be disabled when the job is scheduled.
◆ Optionally, a commit synchronize command may be issued following a successful push.
Configlet SSH/SCP, SSH/FTP, orTelnet/FTP
load replace(replaces based on content as issued using the editor)
With replace keyword in first line of content the configlet replaces the configuration.Without the keyword replace the content merges with the configuration.
Configlet SSH or Telnet Line-by-line Merge
Full Configuration SSH/SCP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Load Override Override
Full Configuration SSH,Telnet Load Override Terminal Override
Juniper Router 301
Juniper Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys Yes
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings Yes
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix302
Juniper Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Juniper J Series
◆ In a Juniper device, the SNMP Contact and SNMP Location values must be set as alphabetical. If the SNMP Contact and SNMP Location are set with special wild card characters (such as hyphen or slash ( - , \, and others), only the information before the wild card character is displayed within the General Tab of the Device Properties.
◆ For OS Upgrade:
• During the OS upgrade process, Juniper does not allow the deletion of some files within the Temp Folder (/var/tmp). To clean the Temp Folder, manually delete any unneeded files to free up additional system space.
Juniper Router
◆ OS Upgrade:
• OS Upgrade will not upgrade a Juniper Router that has more than one routing engine.
◆ Configlets may contain config mode command-line interface commands, such as:
set snmp contact EMCcontact
set snmp location EMClocation
or formatted config snippets, such as:
snmp{
contact EMCcontact
location EMClocation
}
but must not contain both formats.
Juniper Router 303
Juniper Devices
Juniper Switch (EX Series)
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Juniper EX Series
EX3200, EX3200-24T, EX3200-24T-DC, EX3200-24P, EX3200-48T, EX3200-48T-DC, EX3200-48P,EX4200, EX4200-24T, EX4200-24T-DC, EX4200-24P, EX4200-24F, EX4200-24F-DC, EX4200-48T, EX4200-48T-DC, EX4200-48P, EX8208, EX8216
http://www.juniper.net/
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Text
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH/SCP
JunOS Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band Password, SNMP Community
JunOS v9.2 and 9.3
Text by SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH/SCP, Telnet
Text by SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH/SCP
Terminal
Supported using FTP or SCP
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, View Interfaces, View Processor, View Diagnostic, Clear Cache
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial NumberFor Non-SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix304
Juniper Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, MAC and OS version using SNMP or the Command-Line Interface
◆ Filesystem and Memory using the Command-Line Interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or the Command-Line Interface
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For Text (running) config using FTP or SCP:
• Using the command line interface configuration mode, issue the save [filename] command.
• Use FTP to transfer the configuration to the server.
◆ For Text (running) config using Telnet or SSH:
• Using the command line interface, issue the show configuration command.
• Capture the command line interface output.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Using FTP or SCP:
• The configuration is transferred to the switch using FTP or SCP.
• Using the command line interface, issue the load [mode] [filename] command, where [mode] is replace for configlets and override for full configurations.
◆ Using Telnet or SSH:
• From the command-line interface in config mode, send one of the following:
– for a full config: load override terminal– for a configlet: load replace terminal– for a batch of set commands: load set terminal
• The configuration is then sent to the command-line interface session as one large text block.
• A Ctrl-D is sent to complete loading.
◆ Unsuccessful pushes will automatically be followed by a 'rollback 0' command.
◆ Successful pushes will, by default, automatically be followed by a commit command. This can be disabled when the job is scheduled.
◆ Optionally, a commit synchronize command may be issued following a successful push.
Juniper Switch (EX Series) 305
Juniper Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Text
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys Yes
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings Yes
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix306
Juniper Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Juniper EX
◆ When managing a stack of EX4200s, the system properties and hardware are shown for the master switch only.
◆ Configlets may contain config mode command-line interface commands, such as:
set snmp contact EMCcontact
set snmp location EMClocation
or formatted config snippets, such as:
snmp{
contact EMCcontact
location EMClocation
}
but must not contain both formats.
Juniper Switch (EX Series) 307
Juniper Devices
Juniper EX2500 Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Swtich
EX2500
http://www.juniper.net/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Running, Active, Backup
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/SCP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
Account, SNMP
EX2500 OS v3.0+
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, View Interfaces, View Processor, View Diagnostic, Clear Cache
Memory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix308
Juniper Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, MAC, OS version, Memory, and Interfaces using SNMP or the Command-Line Interface
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Using Telnet or SSH:
• The command show (running|active|backup)-config is entered in the command-line interface, and the output is captured.
◆ Using Telnet/TFTP or SSH/TFTP:
• To transfer the file to the device server, enter the command copy (running|active|backup)-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] in the command-line interface.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Using Telnet or SSH:
• A command-line interface session is started and brought to config mode
• The configuration is sent to the command-line interface session line by line and each response is checked for error responses.
• The running config can only be deployed using Telnet or SSH.
◆ Using Telnet/TFTP or SSH/TFTP:
• To transfer the config from the device server directly to the selected config, tThe command copy tftp (running|active|backup)-config://[serverip]/[filename] is entered in the command-line interface.
• The running config cannot be deployed using Telnet/TFTP or SSH/TFTP.
◆ The command copy running-config active-config can optionally be issued following the configuration deployment.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Running
Active
Backup
Juniper EX2500 Switch 309
Juniper Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix310
Juniper Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Juniper EX2500 Switch
◆ When sending a config line by line using Telnet or SSH, sending an ip-mgmt interface address command causes the immediate dropping of the terminal session.
• The driver intentionally filters out any configuration line that starts with ip-mgmt interface address when sending in line by line mode.
◆ When sending a config line by line using Telnet or SSH, it is unknown whether commands that change passwords are processed correctly, since password commands in the command-line interface are normally interactive.
• Any job that sends a password command in line by line mode will receive a warning message. The command is sent, but the job result will note that the command may not process correctly. This is a known Juniper issue.
◆ The Juniper EX2500 local AAA system only supports 10 user accounts. If the new user does not already exist when rolling users and passwords, the driver will attempt to reuse the old user account if it exists. If the old user account does not exist, the driver will look for an available user account. If there are no available user accounts, no changes will be made and the job will fail.
◆ The Juniper EX2500 has console logging enabled by default. It is advisable to permanently turn off console logging on any Juniper EX2500 devices that will be managed by this application, since the device sends console messages during the login procedure. During testing, the driver managed to login despite these console messages, but the messages slow down the login procedure dramatically. For best performance, turn off console logging permanently using the following commands:
configure terminal
no logging console
end
save running-config startup-config
Juniper EX2500 Switch 311
Juniper Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix312
32
Laurel Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Laurel ST Router.......................................................................................................... 314
Laurel Devices 313
Laurel Devices
Laurel ST Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Management (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band, SNMP)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectId
• Contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.5395.1.1.1.1.1
◆ sysDescr
• Contains Laurel
Router
ST200
-
No
Single ASCII
Config, Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
SSH/SCP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
3.1.1R2.1
SSH/SCP
SSH/SCP
Terminal
Interfaces, Serial Number, OS Version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix314
Laurel Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show configuration | save vc-running.txt
• File vc-running.txt is transferred using SCP to the server.
◆ file delete vc-running.txt
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ File push-configType-deviceId.cmd is transferred using SCP to the device
◆ configure
◆ run test configuration push-configType-deviceId.cmd
◆ If no errors occur, load merge push-configType-deviceId.cmd
◆ If successful, commit confirm
◆ file delete push-configType-deviceId.cmd
◆ commit
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
Laurel ST Router 315
Laurel Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Laurel ST Router
◆ Config mode intentionally displays an error if any other session is in configuration mode. This avoids unrelated commits when multiple users are provisioning.
◆ Push to running with copy to start is the only push type, as commits must always be completed otherwise the changes are rolled back after 10 minutes.
◆ Configlets cannot contain {}'s in their content, as this distinguishes them from full configs in the driver.
• Configlets are sent line-by-line to the command line interface.
• Full configurations are copied, checked, and then applied using load merge filename.
◆ Account credential rolls change only the password, not the user.
◆ There is no volatile or non-volatile storage information available using SNMP for this device class.
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix316
33
Lucent Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Lucent Access Point .................................................................................................... 318
Lucent Devices 317
Lucent Devices
Lucent Access Point
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysDescr
• contains Lucent Access Point
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ gen-script all
◆ Add system file-transfer-info.8 source dest NVRAM
Lucent Access Point
300, 450, 600, 1000 (only 300 and 450 have been tested)
www.alcatel-lucent.com
No
Single Text
Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet
SSH Only, Telnet Only
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, SSH, SSH/SCP, Terminal/FTP
Terminal, SSH
Terminal
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix318
Lucent Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Configs can be pushed using SSH/Telnet, SCP, or TFTP
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Lucent Access Point 319
Lucent Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix320
34
Marconi Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Marconi ASX ................................................................................................................ 322
Marconi Devices 321
Marconi Devices
Marconi ASX
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectId
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.326.2.2
◆ sysServices
• Bit 2 set
Switch
ASX-1000
http://www.marconi.com/
No
SNMP Traps, Syslog
ASCII (Config Representation), Binary (Backup/Restore)
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-band, SNMP
7.0.0
Telnet/TFTP
Telnet/TFTP
Telnet
Ping, View Routes, View ATM ARP, View LEC ARP, View Interfaces
Interfaces, Serial Number, OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix322
Marconi Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Running
• system cdb backup -url tftp:// deviceServerAddr/remoteFilename
◆ Readable
• batch create -url tftp:// deviceServerAddr/remoteFilename
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Backup and Restore are only available for full configs.
◆ Binary
• system cdb restore -url tftp:// deviceServerAddr/remoteFilename
Device commands
The following device command sets must be enabled to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
system cdb [ backup | restore ]
system ping
interfaces ip show
interfaces ip route show
services atmarp show
interfaces lec arp show
◆ Password Management
security login [ new | delete | password ]
password
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
readable
running
Marconi ASX 323
Marconi Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issuesThe following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Marconi ASX
◆ No volatile or non-volatile storage information is available using SNMP, for this device class.
◆ Serial number falls uses the primary MAC address if the envMgmtBoardSerialNumber OID in the Fore-SWITCH-MIB is unavailable.
◆ The binary configuration is represented as base64-encoded data in the Config Editor, allowing support for configlet pushes for this destination.
◆ The read/write community string is given the Admin profile during creation.
Access Control Lists No
ARP Table No
CAM Table No
Device Identity Yes
File System Information No
Hardware Information No
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLANs No
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix324
35
McAfee Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ McAfee IntruShield..................................................................................................... 326
McAfee Devices 325
McAfee Devices
McAfee IntruShield
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Content
Configuration Capture
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectId
• Contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.3.2.10
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show
◆ show ssl config
◆ show tacacs
Other
I4000
www.mcafee.com
No
Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
Telnet, SSH
Telnet, SSH
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band
4.1.1.49
Telnet, SSH
Terminal
Serial Number, OS Version, Interfaces, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix326
McAfee Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information Yes
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
McAfee IntruShield 327
McAfee Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
McAfee IntruShield
◆ There is no volatile or non-volatile storage information available using SNMP for this device class.
◆ SNMP credential management must be performed with McAfee's ISM server. An error message will display if credential management is attempted through VoyenceControl.
◆ The device class does not support the concept of configuration push. The output for the following commands contains all the data and cannot be edited:
◆ show
◆ show ssl config
◆ show tacacs
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix328
36
Milan Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ SM801P Managed Switch........................................................................................... 330
Milan Devices 329
Milan Devices
SM801P Managed Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Switch Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ System Object ID
• enterprises.835.25.1.1.1.1
Milan
SM801P, SME801P
http://www.milan.com
No
Single, Binary
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Config
HTTP/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP, Non-SNMP
Menu Driven, Web Based
SNMP
In-Band, Terminal
SM801P-V117, SM801P-V118, SME801P-V200
Terminal, SNMP
Terminal, SNMP
Telnet Only
HTTP/TFTP
View VLAN, Device Uptime, Device Info
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Serial Number, Model, OS VersionFor Non-SNMP: Serial Number, Model, OS VersionFor HTTP: Supplemental, Serial Number, Model, OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix330
Milan Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
SM801P Managed Switch 331
Milan Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix332
37
Motorola BSR
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Motorola BSR Router .................................................................................................. 334
Motorola BSR 333
Motorola BSR
Motorola BSR Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Credentials Management (In-Band, SNMP)
◆ Operating System Management (TFTP)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID MIB scalar is retrieved and checked for the RiverDeltaNetworks enterprise value (4981):
• The value is used as an enumeration to identify the product, documented in $VOYENCE_HOME/package/pkgxml/ MotoBSRChassisTypes.xml.
• If the resulting product name is longer than one character, and sysServices MIB scalar has bit 3 set, discovery is successful.
Router
BSR64000 (BSR1000 and OSR2000 may be supported; unverified)
Customer Supplied
No
running, startup
ASCII
Telnet, SSH, TFTP
Command-Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
3.1.1.14P03C.KRCU4.2.0.08P07.H20.KRCU
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
Terminal
TFTP
View Interfaces, View Routes, Ping, Traceroute, View ARP, Clear Interface Counters, View Processor CPU, Resync
Memory, Non-Volatile Storage, Card Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix334
Motorola BSR
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device (enable/privileged mode required).
◆ Using Terminal:
• show running-config
• show startup-config
◆ Using file transfer (untested):
• copy running-config tftp:
• copy startup-config tftp:
Configuration deployThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Using Terminal (Telnet/SSH):
• Configuration commands are issued interactively.
◆ Using File Transfer:
• Configuration is pushed to running or startup.
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
boot system
enable [secret]
configure
page [off|on]
show running-config
show startup-config
show boot
show chassis
show process
show update
show version
update chassis
ping
traceroute
show arp
show ip route
Motorola BSR Router 335
Motorola BSR
show interface brief
traceroute
◆ File Management
copy [tftp:]
delete
dir
◆ Password Management
[no] snmp-server
[no] username
password telnet
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix336
Motorola BSR
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
Motorola BSR Router 337
Motorola BSR
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix338
38
MRV Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ MRV LX Terminal Server ........................................................................................... 340
MRV Devices 339
MRV Devices
MRV LX Terminal Server
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SNMP SysDescr
◆ Model from SysObjectIDs: 1.3.6.1.4.1.33.100.1.2.1.*
◆ S/N at .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6.1
◆ OS at .1.3.6.1.4.1.33.100.1.1.4.0
◆ Interface table from MIB-2
◆ Enterprise MIB at .1.3.6.1.4.1.133
MRV LX Terminal Server
All LX Series Models
http://service.mrv.com/support/index.cfm
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Text (running config only)
Quick Commands, Configlet Termlet, Command, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
CLI, SNMP
SNMP
In-Band
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Ping
Power Supplies, Character Ports, Ethernet Ports, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix340
MRV Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• save configuration network [filename] [serverIP]
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• load configuration from network [filename] [serverIP]
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
MRV LX Terminal Server 341
MRV Devices
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix342
39
NetCache Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ NetCache ...................................................................................................................... 344
NetCache Devices 343
NetCache Devices
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
NetCache
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
NetCache
C1200
www.netapp.com
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH Only, Telnet Only
CLI
SNMP Only
In-Band, SNMP
Text Capture by means of show config
Text CLI by means of Telnet or SSH
Terminal
System Config
Hardware Inventory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, OS Version, Hardware Information
running
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix344
NetCache Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
NetCache 345
NetCache Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix346
40
Netopia Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Netopia R7000 Series .................................................................................................. 348
Netopia Devices 347
Netopia Devices
Netopia R7000 Series
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysDescr
• Contains Netopia and one of the following: R7200, R7220, or R7231
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Utilities and Diagnostics
◆ Trivial File Transfer protocol (TFTP)
◆ SEND CONFIG TO SERVER
Netopia Router
R7000 series
http://www..netopia.com/
Yes
Binary
Termlet Merge
Telnet/TFTP, Telnet Only
Menu Driven
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
TFTP
TFTP
Terminal, ANSI
Ping, TraceRoute
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix348
Netopia Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Utilities and Diagnostics
◆ Trivial File Transfer protocol (TFTP)
◆ GET CONFIG FROM SERVER
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Netopia R7000 Series 349
Netopia Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix350
41
NetScreen Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ NetScreen Firewall ...................................................................................................... 352
NetScreen Devices 351
NetScreen Devices
NetScreen Firewall
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
NetScreen
NS5, NS10, NS100, NS1000, NS500, NS50, NS25, NS204, NS208, NS5XT, NS5XP, NS5000, NS5GT, HARDWARESECURITYCLIENT ISG2000, NS5GT-ADSL-ANNEXA, NS5GT-ADSL-ANNEXB, NS5GT-WLAN, NS5GT-ADSL-ANNEXA-WLAN, NS5GT-ADSL-ANNEXB-WLAN, ISG1000,SSG5, SSG5-ISDN, SSG5-V92, SSG5-WLAN, SSG5-ISDN-WLAN, SSG5-V92-WLAN, SSG20, SSG20-WLAN, SSG-520, SSG-550, SSG-140, SSG-250, SSG-320M, SSG-350
www.juniper.net
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, Non-SNMP
Command Line, Web-Based
SNMP, Terminal, SSH
In-Band, SNMP
OS Upgrade
Terminal, SSH, TFTP
Terminal, SSH
Terminal
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix352
NetScreen Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.3224.1.*
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ TFTP:
• get config > tftp ") SERVERIPADDR tftpFile(configFile.filename)+"\n")
◆ NetScreen Pull only supports Term/TFTP
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ NetScreen supports Terminal Pushes, one config line at a time
◆ NetScreen also supports TFTP push using the command: save config from tftp
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
NetScreen Firewall 353
NetScreen Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
NetScreen ScreenOS - Variable Names
◆ In NetScreen ScreenOS version 5.0, the SNMP sysName variable may not display the actual system hostname on the device. In version 5.0, the SNMP sysNAME variable is not updated when the value is changed on the device. This issue does not apply to NetScreen ScreenOS version 4.0.
◆ For the SNMP to display the correct system hostname, the configuration line must be set correctly with the following syntax: set snmp name "<hostname>".
◆ Get OS Quick Command
• This View Processor CPU command is not supported in the NetScreen ScreenOS versions, up to and including, version 4.X.
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix354
42
Nokia Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Nokia IP ........................................................................................................................ 356
Nokia Devices 355
Nokia Devices
Nokia IP
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Other Unique Information
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Firewall Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Nokia IPSO Firewall
IP260, IP265, IP350, IP355, IP380, IP385, IP390, IP45, IP560, IP1220, IP1260, IP2255
http://www.nokia.com
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Unix like operating system
Multiple Text, Multiple/Complex
Command, Config, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge, Operating System, Device Setting
SSH/SCP, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
Terminal, SSH, FTP, SCP
Terminal, SSH, FTP, SCP
Terminal
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Ping, Traceroute, View Interfaces, View ARP, View Routes, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix356
Nokia Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Custom or Vendor Specific OIDs
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.94.1.21.1.1.1.0
– 7H055101054– Discovery is done using SNMP using the string 'IPSO' in MIB-11's sysDescr
scalar– Chassis Serial Number is obtained first from ENTITY-MIB, and if it fails,
the IPSO Chassis is the Serial Number in NOKIA-IPSO-SYSTEM-MIB• 1.3.6.1.4.1.2620.1.1.10.0
– FireWall-1
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are pushed usingusing a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Use the Unix file commands to put the files back into place.
◆ The files listed in the Multi-Config Files section for this device are retrieved using a combination of SSH and SCP commands.
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
clish -c 'add snmp community …'
clish -c `copy …'
reboot
ifconfig
ping
traceroute
arp
netstat
◆ File Management
mkdir
Nokia IP 357
Nokia Devices
cp
ls
◆ Password Management
dbpasswd
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only Type Editable Required
$base_dir/conf/netso.C Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/objects.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/InternalCA.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/snmp.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/SDS_objects.C Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/classes.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/lea_server_unification_scheme.C
Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/log_unification_scheme.C Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/newobjects.C Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/refs.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/tables.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/userdef.C Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpha.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/cphaprob.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpmap_config.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpmap_opsec.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cpmap_rulebase.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cp.lf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/product.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwauthd.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwopsec.conf Text Yes Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix358
Nokia Devices
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
$base_dir/conf/slapd.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/smtp.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/omi.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/thresholds.conf Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwmusers Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/gui-clients Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/external.if Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/cp.license Text Yes
$base_dir/conf/masters Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/*.W Text Yes Yes
/config/active Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/state/* Binary Yes
$base_dir/conf/serverkeys.* Binary
$base_dir/database/* Binary Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwauth.NDB Binary Yes
$base_dir/conf/fwauth.keys Binary
$base_dir/conf/rulebases.fws Binary
$base_dir/conf/cp.license Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/conf/sic_policy.conf Text Yes Yes
$base_dir/database/cprid/cprid_keys/* Binary
$base_dir/database/cprid/cprid_util_keys/* Binary
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only Type Editable Required
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Nokia IP 359
Nokia Devices
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix360
43
Nortel Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Nortel Alteon ............................................................................................................... 362◆ Nortel Alteon 2400 ...................................................................................................... 365◆ Nortel Router ............................................................................................................... 367◆ Nortel Baystack............................................................................................................ 370◆ Nortel BoSS Switch ..................................................................................................... 372◆ Nortel Contivity .......................................................................................................... 375◆ Nortel Multi-Service Switch ...................................................................................... 377◆ Nortel Passport ............................................................................................................ 380◆ Nortel Passport 8600 ................................................................................................... 382◆ Nortel 4500 Switch ...................................................................................................... 385
Nortel Devices 361
Nortel Devices
Nortel Alteon
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Credential Management
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Discovery using SNMP
◆ SysDecr contains one of the following:
• Alteon
• Nortel Application Switch
Load Balancer
184, 180e, 2208, 2216, 2216 E, 2424, 2424 SSL, 3408 AD3, AD4, ASF-5009-x305, iSD SSL
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Startup, Running Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH, Telnet, SNMP/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH, Telnet, SNMP/TFTP
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH, Telnet, SNMP/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Interfaces, View ARP, View Routes
Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix362
Nortel Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH:
• /cfg/dump
◆ Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• /cfg/ptcfg tftpIpAddress remoteFilename -tftp -mgmt
◆ SNMP/TFTP:
• The driver tests for ALTEEON-TIGON- or ALTEON-CHEETAH-MIB support and uses corresponding MIB values to pull the configuration.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH:
• Commands are issued to the command line interface and the results are scanned for errors.
◆ Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• /cfg/gtcfg tftpIpAddress remoteFilename -tftp -mgmt
◆ SNMP/TFTP:
• The driver tests for ALTEEON-TIGON- or ALTEON-CHEETAH-MIB support and uses corresponding MIB values to push the configuration.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Nortel Alteon 363
Nortel Devices
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Nortel Alteon
◆ No restrictions are enforced on password length.
◆ For terminal pushes, the script configuration line is skipped.
◆ Configuration management using SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP exhibits problems for push, depending on OS version.
• For example, the Main menu is displayed and Error: Successful is reported, but the configuration changes are ignored.
◆ Depending on the running software version, the following commands generate errors and must be removed or commented out for a push to be successful using terminal.
• tnet ena
• /cfg/sys/sshd/ena
• /cfg/sys/sshd/on
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix364
Nortel Devices
Nortel Alteon 2400
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appears in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Discovery using SNMP
• sysDescr contains Alteon or Nortel, followed by Application Switch 24
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH
• /cfg/dump
◆ Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP
• /cfg/ptcfg tftpIpAddress remoteFilename -tftp -mgmt
Load Balancer, Firewall
2424
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Startup, Running Text
Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP
CLI
SNMP
Telnet, SSH
Telnet, SSH
Terminal
Test Credentials, Diagnostics, NAT Configuration, View Interfaces, View ARP, View Routes
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
Nortel Alteon 2400 365
Nortel Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Telnet/SSH:
• Commands are issued to the CLI and the results scanned for errors
◆ Telnet/TFTP and SSH/TFTP:
• /cfg/gtcfg tftpIpAddress remoteFilename -tftp -mgmt
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Nortel Alteon 2400
◆ Configuration management using TFTP has shown problems for push, and is currently disabled. Configuration changes are ignored, even if the main menu is displayed and an Error: Successful message is displayed.
◆ The script configuration line is skipped in terminal pushes.
◆ The following commands have been observed to generate errors, and must be removed or commented-out for a push to be successful using Terminal.
• tnet ena
• /cfg/sys/sshd/ena
• /cfg/sys/sshd/on
◆ Restrictions on password length are not enforced.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix366
Nortel Devices
Nortel Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model OID
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.18.3.1.1.1.0
◆ OS Version
• retrieved from sysDescr
Router
AN, ARN, BCN, BLN, BLN, ASN, Passport 2430, Router 5580, Router 5430
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Single Text, Binary
Command, Config, Configlet, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet
Telnet/FTP, Telnet Only
Command Line, Menu Driven
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
15.4.0.1, 15.4.0.2, 15.4.2.6
Terminal, FTP
Terminal, FTP
Terminal
OS Upgrade
Test Credentials, Ping, View ARP, View Memory, View Routes, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
Nortel Router 367
Nortel Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Term pull
• more off
• show config -all
◆ FTP pull
• Term login and determine directory
• Standard FTP using the directory number
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Term push
• Pushes the config one line by line
◆ FTP push
• Term login and determine directory
• Standard FTP put using directory number
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
binary config
text config
config report
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix368
Nortel Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Nortel ARN - Pushing Command using Configlet
◆ Issue: Pushing Command using Configlet is displaying as completed with a warning message when the Push type is Push to Run.
◆ Resolution: Config pushes to the ARN must be executed using the Telnet mechanism. The configuration, which is modified and pushed, must be a configuration pulled using Telnet.
An ARN config pulled using Telnet, can be edited, and will not have binary data displayed at the bottom of the configuration.
A configuration pulled using Telnet/TFTP, will have the text string <VoyenceControl_Config_file><FilePath>Text Config</FilePath><humanReadable editable="false"<>![CDATA[ displayed at the top of the configuration, and will have binary data present at the end of the configuration.
This configuration can not be edited, as indicated by the humanReadable editable="false" string.
The Telnet/TFTP config should be pushed back to the ARN device for rollback only.
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
Nortel Router 369
Nortel Devices
Nortel Baystack
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ OS version
• Retrieved from sysDescr
Nortel Baystack Switch
Tested: 450, 410 350, 350-12T, 380-24FUntested: 2550T, 2550T-PWR,3510-24T, 4524GT, 4526FX, 4526GTX, 4526GTX-PWR, 5650TD
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Binary
Command, Config, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet
Telnet/TFTP, Telnet Only
Menu Driven
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
4.0.2.2, 4.4.0.6, 4.5.1.1
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
OS Upgrade
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix370
Nortel Devices
◆ Serial number OID
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.45.1.6.3.1.6.0
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
binary config
text config
snmp config
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
Nortel Baystack 371
Nortel Devices
Nortel BoSS Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ OS Version
• From sysDescr
Nortel Baystack BPS 2000 Switch
BPS 2000 and Baystack 470
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Binary
Command, Config, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge
Telnet/TFTP, Telnet Only
Command Line, Menu Driven
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
3.1.4.11, 3.6.03, 3.5.0.58
TFTP
TFTP
Terminal
OS Upgrade
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix372
Nortel Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Copy config tftp address <server ip> filename <pull filename>
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Copy tftp config address <server ip> filename <pull filename>
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
binary config
text config
snmp config
Atributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
Nortel BoSS Switch 373
Nortel Devices
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
Atributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix374
Nortel Devices
Nortel Contivity
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID is used to determine the various models
Nortel VPN
6001000, 1010, 1050, 1100, 15XX 1600, 1700, 1740, 1750,2000, 2500, 2600, 2700, 4500, 4600
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Binary
Command, Config, Configlet, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet
SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
4_70.119
Terminal, FTP
Terminal, FTP
Terminal
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Interfaces
Nortel Contivity 375
Nortel Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix376
Nortel Devices
Nortel Multi-Service Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Multi-Service Switch
74801500020000Nortel Carrier Passport
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
SNMP Traps, Syslog
Multiple Text, Binary
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet/FTP
CLI
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band, SNMP
Telnet/FTP
Telnet/FTP
Terminal
OS Upgrade
Test Credentials, Diagnostics, Ping, OS Update, Acknowledge Prov, Confirm Prov, Save Prov, Commit Prov, NAT Configuration
SNMP, Terminal: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Hardware Information
Nortel Multi-Service Switch 377
Nortel Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SNMP:
• SysDescr contains Carrier Passport
• SysObjectID matches 1.3.6.1.4.1.562
• SysServices Layer 2 and Layer 3
◆ Terminal:
• system name is extracted from display -noTabular Mod Nodename: must have nodename = name content
• chassis serial number is derived from display -noTabular Vr/ Ip If/: must have hardwareAddress = value; the : characters are removed and the remaining content is used as-is
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix378
Nortel Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Nortel Multi-Service Switch
◆ Chassis serial number using terminal may change based on hot-sparing behavior for control processor switchover, since it is based on the hardwareAddress information of the active CP
◆ Model information using terminal is based on the following criteria:
• display -noTabular Shelf shelfType is fabricBasedShelf for Passport 15000 and 20000, and busBasedShelf for Passport 7400
• display -noTabular Shelf slotConfiguration is 40G for Passport 15000
◆ O/S version using terminal depends on the base_ naming convention of the software distribution in the output of the display -noTabular Sw avl command
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
Nortel Multi-Service Switch 379
Nortel Devices
Nortel Passport
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ The OSI layer 3 bit (0x04) is set in sysServices
◆ sysObjectID
• Contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.2272.43.
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ upload configuration <server IP> <filename>
Nortel Router, Nortel Switch
1648T
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Binary
Command, Config, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet
Telnet/TFTP
Command Line
SNMP
TFTP
TFTP
Terminal
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix380
Nortel Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ download configuration <server IP> <filename>
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Nortel Passport 381
Nortel Devices
Nortel Passport 8600
Device Type
Specific Model(s)8106, 8110, 8310, 8603, 8606, 8610
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Routing Switch
1050, 1200, 1250
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Single Text
Command, Config, Configlet, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge
Telnet/TFTP, Telnet Only
Command Line
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
3.5.1.0, 3.5.3.0, 3.7.2.0
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
OS Upgrade
Test Credentials, Ping, Traceroute, View Sys Info, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix382
Nortel Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ OS Version: From sysDescr
◆ Serial number OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.2272.1.4.2.0
◆ Model: Retrieved from sysObjectID
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
Terminal mode uses show config.
TFTP pull is possible using the copy command.
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Terminal mode pushes the config one line-by-line.
◆ TFTP push is possible using the copy command.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
boot.cfg
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Nortel Passport 8600 383
Nortel Devices
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Nortel Passport 8600 - Syntax/Constraint Violations
◆ Passport configurations may contain syntax or other constraint violations that prevent the configuration from being pushed to the device. These syntax constraint violations are part of the configuration retrieved from the device. Be aware you may have to correct the constraint violations when configuration pushes occur.
The Schedule Manager shows the last ten lines of the configuration push, including the devices response to aid in this effort.
Nortel Passport 8600 - Unable to Config Push to Nortel Passport 8600
◆ Some of the commands in the Nortel Passport 8600 device require privileged permission to modify. Access using the RWA (Read Write All) account is required. If one attempts to push the running config with a lower privileged account (e.g. Manager) the push will fail.
For example the mac-flap-time-limit is a privileged command and attempting to push it causes the Nortel Passport 8600 device to give a Permission Denied error.
Nortel Passport 8100 - Config Push fails
◆ Issue: When executing a configuration push to the Nortel Passport 8000 Series device, the configuration push may not be successful due to lines present in the device configuration that are not valid configuration commands for the device.
◆ Resolution: Determine the correct device configuration command for that particular configuration entry, and then push this command using the Configlet Editor.
◆
◆
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix384
Nortel Devices
Nortel 4500 Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Credentials Management (Change Passwords, Roll Passwords, SNMP Communities)
Switch
Tested: 4550TUntested: 2526T, 2526T-PWR, 4526T-PWR, 4550T-PWR, 4548GT, 4548GT-PWR
http://www.nortel.com/
Yes
ASCII, Binary
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
Account, SNMP
5.1.2.004
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, View Interfaces, Vioew Routes, View ARP
Identity, Model, Software Version, Serial Number, Interfaces, Inventory
Nortel 4500 Switch 385
Nortel Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SNMP:
• sysDescr and sysObjectID oind must be accessible from the device agent
• sysDescr must contain Ethernet Routing Switch
• sysObjectID must map to a model in NortelSwitch4500.models
• IF-MIB and optionally IP-MIB must be supported by the device agent
◆ Terminal:
• the session banner must contain the model name as well as Ethernet Routing Switch
– Model name must map to a sysObjectID fragment in NortelSwitchModels.xml
• the show ip and show interfaces verbose commands must return usable output
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ ASCII:
• copy running-config tftp address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
◆ Binary:
• copy config tftp address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ ASCII:
• configure network address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
◆ Binary:
• copy tftp config address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix386
Nortel Devices
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
• terminal length 0
• terminal width 132
• show system verbose
• show tech
• show ip
• show interfaces verbose
• show running-config
• copy running-config tftp address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
• copy config tftp address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
• configure network address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
• copy tftp config address remoteIpAddr filename remoteName
• write memory
• show ip default-gateway
• show arp-table
◆ Password Management
• show radius-server
• snmp-server community secret [ro|rw]
• username name password rw
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only Post Operations
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running-ascii copy to start
running-binary reboots automatically
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Nortel 4500 Switch 387
Nortel Devices
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Nortel 4500 Switch
◆ The read-only account (typically RO) cannot be used for device management since it cannot be promoted to read-write status. Most commands will fail with Invalid input as a result.
◆ The device driver supports one set of account and SNMP credentials per device. This is a limitation of the device architecture.
◆ The delay in pulling and pushing binary configurations appears to be directly related to the number of switches in the stack.
◆ Pushing a binary configuration is service-affecting: other connected sessions will hang during the file transfer, and the device will reboot without any confirmation.
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs Yes
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix388
44
Overture Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Overture NC ................................................................................................................ 390◆ Overture NG ................................................................................................................ 393◆ Overture NP................................................................................................................. 396
Overture Devices 389
Overture Devices
Overture NC
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Operating System
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Operating System Management
System Properties
Hardware Properties
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (SNMP, Identify)
◆ System Properties (Model, Software Version, Contact Information, etc.)
◆ Configuration Capture
◆ Configuration Deploy
◆ Credential Management (SNMP)
◆ Operating System Management
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ For SNMP:
• The sysObjectID OID must be accessible from the device agent.
• The serial number must be available at 1.3.6.1.4.1.7950.2.10.1.2
Overture NC
ISG 45+, 34, 45, 140, 180, 140V, 180V
http://www.overturenetworks.com/
No
8.1.0.22.6, 9.1.0.9
Traps
SNMP/FTP
Binary
SNMP/FTP
SNMP
SNMP
SNMP/FTP
SNMP/FTP
SNMP/FTP
Model, Software Version, Contact, Location, Serial Number
Software Version, Serial Number, Manufacture Date, Hardware Revision
View Interfaces
Serial Number, Manufacture Date, Software Version, Hardware Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix390
Overture Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Text config:
• Configuration display only
◆ Binary config:
• Requires anonymous FTP access to the managing Device Server.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Binary config:
• Requires anonymous FTP access to the managing Device Server.
◆ Text
• Text configuration data can be pushed using the Config or Configlet editor using SNMP set messages.
• User must have knowledge of what SNMP oids are writeable and can be pushed. User must adhere to the format of the pulled text config lines.
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ An FTP transfer service must be configured for this device. See “Configuring FTP Transfer Service” on page 32 for more information.
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Overture NC 391
Overture Devices
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Overture NC
◆ SNMP/TFTP is displayed in the user interface for communication, configuration capture, configuration deploy, and software upgrades, although the device driver actually uses SNMP/FTP.
◆ The get ARP command can return a warning message for an unavailable MAC address due to incomplete MAC address entries.
◆ During text configuration pulls, errors or warnings can display for the SNMP OIDs due to the SNMP OIDs not being populated for that device.
◆ The device file system is unavailable, resulting in a temporary file-system being used for OS upgrades.
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix392
Overture Devices
Overture NG
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Operating System
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
User Interface
Configuration Protocols
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Operating System Management
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (SNMP, SSH, Telnet, Identify)
◆ System Properties (Model, Software Version, Serial Number, etc.)
◆ Configuration Capture
◆ Configuration Deploy
◆ Credential Management (SNMP, SSH/Telnet)
◆ Hardware Properties (Pull Hardware Inventory)
◆ Operating System Management
Overture NG
ISG6000
http://www.overturenetworks.com/
No
9.1.0.80.1
Syslog, Traps
SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
Text
SSH, Telnet, FTP/SCP, SNMPv2, Syslog
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
SNMP, SSH, Telnet
SNMP, SSH, Telnet
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
FTP, SCP
Serial Number, Manufacture Date, Software Version, Hardware Version, Cards, Memory, Power Supply, MAC Adress, Model Description
Overture NG 393
Overture Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Using SSH/Telnet:
• Description or hostname must contain the model information as a string ISG6000.
• Serial number must be available through information command.
◆ Using SNMP:
• The sysObjectID OID must be accessible from the device agent.
• The serial number must be available at 1.3.6.1.4.1.7950.2.11.1.2.3.1.8.
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Text config:
• Configuration parameters that are stored by the device
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Text:
• Text configuration data can be pushed using config or configlet editor using command-line interface commands or using FTP and command-line interface.
Operating System Management
The following are the commands that are used to do an operating system upgrade.
◆ The device can download images to its flash using SSH/Telnet and FTP/SCP. The device must be rebooted to activate the flash image.
• The device provides a FTP server but an FTP client is not supported for the device, to start a FTP session. The FTP session must be started from the device server.
• The image should be copied into the $TFTPHOMEDIR directory on the device server. The image path should be relative to the $TFTPHOMEDIR directory. For example, if the image is in /tftpboot/ftp/image/isg6k_app.ovn.9.1.0.80.1 then the path for the image name in the operating system inventory should be ftp/image/ isg6k_app.ovn.9.1.0.80.1.
• While using the server for the operating system update, only the mechanism is used. The ftp username and password must be the same as the device account credentials.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix394
Overture Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issuesThe following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Overture NG
◆ No command exists to show the model information using term. When discovering using term, System Description or Hostname should contain the string ISG6000.
◆ The device does not disclose file system information. Adummy file-system is used for operating system upgrades.
◆ Physical Hardware using SNMP is not supported.
◆ Determination of VLAN support is not supported.
◆ ARP table using Term is not supported.
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Overture NG 395
Overture Devices
Overture NP
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Operating System
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap)
◆ Credential Management (Change or Roll Password, SNMP Communities)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SNMP:
• The sysObjectID OID must be accessible from the device agent.
• The model must be available using the OID at .1.3.6.1.4.1.7950.2.1.3.2.1.4.1.
• The serial number must be available at .1.3.6.1.4.1.7950.2.1.3.2.1.3.1.
• The ipTable (.1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20) must be supported by the device agent.
◆ Terminal:
• The information command must list the following non-blank information:
Router
2200, 5100
http://overture.icentera.com/portals/
Yes
8.1.0.22
ASCII, Binary
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP, Telnet, SSH
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP (Binary), Telnet, SSH (ASCII)
Telnet/FTP, SSH/FTP (Binary), Telnet, SSH (ASCII)
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Interfaces, View Routes, View ARP
Identity, Model, Software Version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix396
Overture Devices
– Model Name under Board Type .– Serial Number under Main Board ESN.
• The System Object ID must map to the model name in OvertureModels.xml.
• The following commands must return valid interface information:
– port show all status– interface show ifall– interface show ifName
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ ASCII:
• configuration display
◆ Binary:
• configuration save-remote
– Requires anonymous FTP access to the managing Device Server.
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ ASCII:
• Commands are issued interactively at the command line, and the results are scanned for warnings and errors.
◆ Binary:
• configuration restore-remote
– Requires anonymous FTP access to the managing Device Server.
Device commandsFollowing are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
mgmt cli-output set off
configuration display
mgmt-config-server show
mgmt-config-server change ipAddress name secret file-location directory
configuration save-remote
configuration restore-remote
port show all status
interface show ifall
interface show if name
Overture NP 397
Overture Devices
information
slot show cards
mgmt name show
mgmt description show
mgmt location show
mgmt contact show
iproute show
arp show
ping
traceroute
◆ Password Management
mgmt snmp v2only community-list show
mgmt snmp v2only community-list create name access-level type
mgmt snmp v2only community-list delete entry-name name
account show
account password name secret secret
account create name accessLevel level pass
account delete oldUser
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/Pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
binary
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes (See Known Issues)
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix398
Overture Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Overture NP
◆ Non-volatile storage and filesystem information are not obtainable using SNMP or the command line interface for the 8.1.0.22 software version. A placeholder is returned with the flash partition name, but size and usage are not listed.
◆ The configuration restore-defaults command is not used as part of pushing a text configuration, since in almost all cases the managing Device Server will not be on the same subnet as the device. This command clears all settings except for the in-band IP address, which can result in loss of connectivity. As a result, some configuration commands may be listed with warnings in the job results, since these settings are already present.
◆ Certain commands in the mgmt category are listed with a # prefix in the resulting text configuration, although these commands are legal from the command line interface when the prefix is omitted. These commands are skipped during a configuration push because the device treats this character as an invalid command.
◆ An FTP transfer service must be configured for this device. See “Configuring FTP Transfer Service” on page 32 for more information.
◆ The binary configuration push is service-affecting, since the configuration restore-remote command reboots the device after receiving the configuration from the Device Server.
◆ The managing account for the device must have an access-level of security or SNMP/Account Rolls cannot be performed.
◆ Account rolls transfer the access level of the original account to the new one when the names change.
◆ Default accounts cannot be removed. This impacts account credential rolls in the following ways:
• Jobs that define new, equivalent accounts will show a message in the scheduler that the old account cannot be removed.
• Jobs that use a default account as the new account name will simply change the password of this account before removing the non-default account.
Keys No
Memory Yes (See Known Issues)
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
Overture NP 399
Overture Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix400
45
Packeteer Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Packeteer PacketShaper.............................................................................................. 402
Packeteer Devices 401
Packeteer Devices
Packeteer PacketShaper
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Packeteer PacketShaper LoadBalancer
Packetshaper 1000 Packetshaper 1400Packetshaper 1500Packetshaper 1550Packetshaper 1700Packetshaper 2000Packetshaper 2500Packetshaper 2550Packetshaper 3500Packetshaper 4000Packetshaper 4500Packetshaper 6500Packetshaper 7500Packetshaper 8500Packetshaper 9500Packetshaper 10000
http://www.packeteer.com/
Yes
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Multiple Text and Binary
Quick Commands, Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/FTP, Telnet/FTP
CLI, SNMP
SNMP, Terminal
Enable, In-Band
FTP
FTP
Terminal
Ping
For SNMP: Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix402
Packeteer Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs: 1.3.6.1.4.1.2334.*
◆ Interface table from MIB-2
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ The following commands are executed from a command prompt:
• mkdir 9.258/VOYENCE (if needed)
• setup capture complete 9.258/VOYENCE/ASCIICFG.CMD
• config save 9.258/VOYENCE/CONFIG.LDI
• cp 9.256/CFG/SETTINGS.CFG 9.258/VOYENCE/SETTINGS.CFG
• zip -rq 9.258/voyence/PLG.ZIP 9.256/PLG
◆ The above files are then transferred, using the device's built-in FTP server, from the 9.258/VOYENCE/ directory to the VoyenceControl device server.
◆ The files are then base64 encoded (if binary) and merged into a single XML document for storage in the configuration database.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ The XML document is retrieved from the configuration database and separated into four discrete files.
◆ The ASCIICFG.CMD file is a human-readable version of the binary configuration, and can not be restored, so it is discarded.
◆ The remaining three files are transferred to the 9.258/VOYENCE/ directory.
◆ The following commands are run:
• cp 9.258/VOYENCE/CONFIG.LDI 9.256/CFG/CONFIG.LDI
• setup load 9.258/VOYENCE/SETTINGS.CFG
◆ The device prompts for a reboot after loading SETTINGS.CFG, and the driver answers yes to the prompt.
◆ The PLG.ZIP file, which is a zipped archive of the plug-ins directory is left in the 9.258/VOYENCE/ directory, and not processed in any way. The system administrator can select to restore this file manually if needed.
Packeteer PacketShaper 403
Packeteer Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
startup
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix404
46
Paradyne Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Paradyne 9100.............................................................................................................. 406
Paradyne Devices 405
Paradyne Devices
Paradyne 9100
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Credential Management (In-band/SNMP)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through)
Discovery/identify methods
The following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysDescription contains Paradyne iMarc (case-insensitive)
◆ serial number and system name are valid
Device commandsThe following device command sets must be enabled to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Password Management
Main > Load Config > Current > Configuration Edit > Management/Communication
Main > Control > Administer Logins
Router
9100
http://search.zhone.com/query.html
No
Telnet
Menu
SNMP
In-band, SNMP
02.02.03
Terminal
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NatIP Setup
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix406
Paradyne Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
◆ Memory and non-volatile information are not supported by the device SNMP agent. These values are defaulted to 0.
◆ The text ## no configuration support ## is listed in place of the device configuration.
◆ SNMP credentials cannot be changed if SNMP is disabled.
Paradyne 9100 407
Paradyne Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix408
47
Patton Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ SmartNode Router ...................................................................................................... 410
Patton Devices 409
Patton Devices
SmartNode Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configurations)
◆ Credential Roll (In-Band)
Patton SmartNode
SN1200, SN1400,SN2300, SN2400,SN2802, SN2805, SN2821, SN2835, SN4112-JS, SN4112-JO, SN4114-JS, SN4114-JO, SN4116-JS, SN4116-JO, SN4118-JS, SN4118-JO, SN4524-SN4834-JS, SN4522-SN4832-JS, SN4526-SN4836-JS, SN4528-SN4838-JS,, SN4524-SN4834-2JS2JO, SN4526-SN4836-4JS2JO, SN4528-SN4838-4JS4JO, SN4114-2JS2JO, SN4116-4JS2JO, SN4118-4JS4JO, SN4522-SN4832-JO, SN4524-SN4834-JO, SN4526-JO, SN4528-JO, SN4552, SN4562,SN4554, SN4564, SN4908-JS, SN4912-JS, SN4916-JS, SN4924-JS, SN4932-JS, SN4634, SN4638, SN46385BIS, SN4654-C, SN4658-C, SN4654-D, SN4658-D, SN4654-T, SN4658-T, SN4654-K, SN4658-K, SN4654-AA, SN4658-AA, SN4654-AB, SN4658-AB, SN4654-G, SN4658-G, SN4635, SN4639, SN4655-AA, SN4659-AA, SN4655-AB, SN4659-AB, SN4655-G, SN4659-G, SN4960-1E15V, SN4960-1E24V, SN4960-1E30V, SN4960-4E15V, SN4960-4E24V, SN4960-4E30V, SN4960-4E48V, SN4960-4E60V, SN4960-4E96V, SN4960-4E120V, SN4961-1E15V, SN4961-1E24V, SN4961-1E30V, SN4961-4E15V, SN4961-4E24V, SN4961-4E30V, SN4961-4E48V, SN4961-4E60V, SN4961-4E96V, SN4961-4E120V, SN4908-JO, SN4912-JO, SN4916-JO, SN4924-JO, SN4932-JO,SDTA
http://www.patton.com/
No
Startup, Running
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-band
R5.2
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Supported
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, View ARP, View Interfaces, Resync
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix410
Patton Devices
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Operating System Management (TFTP)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, serial number, and operating system version using SNMP or command-line interface.
◆ Memory using command-line interface.
◆ Interface table using SNMP or command-line interface.
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet:
• The show running-config or show startup-config command is issued in the command-line interface, and the file captured directly from the command-line interface output.
◆ For SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP:
• The copy startup-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] or copy running-config tftp://[serverip]/[filename] command is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the file to the device server.
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH or Telnet:
• A command-line interface session is started in config mode, and the configuration is entered line-by-line while monitoring responses for error messages.
◆ For SSH/TFTP or Telnet/TFTP:
• The copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] startup-config or copy tftp://[serverip]/[filename] running-config command is issued in the command-line interface to transfer the configuration to the device from the device server.
SmartNode Router 411
Patton Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Atributed data Support
startup
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix412
48
Radware Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Radware WSD Load Balancer ................................................................................... 414
Radware Devices 413
Radware Devices
Radware WSD Load Balancer
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectIDs: .1.3.6.1.4.1.89.1.1.62.(2|3|4)
◆ OS v8.14+ at .1.3.6.1.4.1.89.2.4.0
◆ Interface table from MIB-2
◆ Enterprise MIB at .1.3.6.1.4.1.89
Radware WSD Load Balancer
All Web Server Director models
http://www.radware.com/
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Text – running config only
Quick Commands, Configlet Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
CLI, SNMP
SNMP
In-Band
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, Interfaces, Routes, ARP, CPU Procs, Resync, Reboot
For SNMP: Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix414
Radware Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• manage tftp file-type set cli
• manage tftp config-file put [temp_filename] [devserver_ip]
◆ For SSH and Telnet capture output from the following commands:
• system config immediate
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• manage tftp file-type set cli
• manage tftp config-file get [temp_filename] [devserver_ip]
◆ For SSH and Telnet:
• The device is brought to a shell prompt
• Issue command: system paste-config start
• The configuration is entered line by line with checks for invalid input.
• Issue command: system paste-config stop
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Radware WSD Load Balancer 415
Radware Devices
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix416
49
Riverbed Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Riverbed Steelhead ..................................................................................................... 418
Riverbed Devices 417
Riverbed Devices
Riverbed Steelhead
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Supported Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Configuration, Rollback, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Credentials Management (In-band, SNMP)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• Retrieved and compared to 1.3.6.1.4.1.17163
• If a match is found, the chassis serial number is pulled (defaults to hostname if unavailable) and the discovery is successful
Load Balancer
Steelhead 100
Customer Supplied
No
running/startup
Ascii
SSH
Command-Line
SNMP
In-band, SNMP
SSH
SSH
SSH
View interfaces, View routes, Ping, Traceroute, View ARP
Interfaces, Memory, Serial Number, OS Version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix418
Riverbed Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Using terminal:
• show configuration running
• show configuration
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Using terminal:
• Device commands are issued interactively from the stored configuration
Device commands
Following are the device command sets you must enable to allow VoyenceControl NG to manage this device class.
◆ Device Configuration and Monitoring
enable
disable
show configuration running
show configuration
reload
configure terminal
no cli session paging enable
configuration write
ping
traceroute
show interfaces brief
show ip route
show arp
◆ Password Management
username
snmp-server community
Riverbed Steelhead 419
Riverbed Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
startup
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix420
Riverbed Devices
Known issues
The following details existing device issues that have been discovered with other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Riverbed Steelhead
◆ There is no support for sysServices (standard MIB scalar). The sysServices variable must be edited in stdlib/stdmib.inc and be made a standard snmp type instead of a snmpcached type.
◆ The sysObjectID represents a vendor, not the model identification.
◆ Configuration management using file transfer is not currently supported, since the results are a binary database.
◆ There is no known support for configuration changes using SNMP traps or syslog facility.
◆ There is no SNMP support for hardware inventory, for example ENTITY-MIB. Information is taken from the HOST-RESOURCES-MIB, which does not support parent/child relationships.
◆ The device family does not currently support creation or management of individual accounts.
Riverbed Steelhead 421
Riverbed Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix422
50
Riverstone Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Riverstone Router........................................................................................................ 424
Riverstone Devices 423
Riverstone Devices
Riverstone Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SysObjectID 1.3.6.1.4.1.17163
◆ Serial Number .1.3.6.1.4.1.17163.1.1.1.2.0
Configuration captureThe following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ no cli session paging enable
◆ show configuration
Router
RS 500, 1000, 2000, 2100, 3000, 8000, 8600, 32000, 38000RSLA 1100, 1200, 1500
See vendor
No
running
Text
SSH
CLI
SNMP
Accounts and SNMP
SSH
SSH
Terminal
Ping, Traceroute, View Routes, NAT
Basic hardware (memory, serial number information)
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix424
Riverstone Devices
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ config terminal
◆ configuration write
Config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning configuration files.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
startup
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Riverstone Router 425
Riverstone Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix426
51
Siemens Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Siemens ......................................................................................................................... 428◆ Siemens hiX56xx DSLAM .......................................................................................... 430
Siemens Devices 427
Siemens Devices
Siemens
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Credentials Management (Change or Roll passwords and SNMP Communities)
Router
5851, 5871, 5940
http://www.siemens.com
Yes
Multiple Text, Multiple/Complex
Command, Config, Configlet, Privilege Mode Termlet, Termlet Merge
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP, Telnet only, SSH only
Command Line
Terminal, SNMP
In-Band
6.1.064
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal, TFTP
Terminal
Test Credentials, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For Terminal: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Hardware Information
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix428
Siemens Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
.*
.*\.(TXT|MFG|HTM)
config
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware No
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Siemens 429
Siemens Devices
Siemens hiX56xx DSLAM
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets, Termlets)
◆ Credential Roll (Enable Password, SNMP Credentials)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Device Commands, Etc.)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Model, Serial Number, and Operating System version using SNMP or Command-Line Interface
◆ Filesystem and Memory using Command-Line Interface
◆ Interface table using SNMP or Command-Line Interface
Siemens hiX56xx DSLAM
hiX5635
http://www.siemens.com/
Yes
Startup, Running
Quick Commands, Configlet, Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet
Command-Line Interface
SNMP, Terminal
In-Band
R1.5
SSH, Telnet
SSH, Telnet
Terminal
Ping, View Interfaces, View Routes, View ARP, Resync
SNMP Entity MIB
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix430
Siemens Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ show running-config
• Command is issued in the command line interface, and the file captured directly from the command line interface output.
◆ show starting-config
• Command is issued in the command line interface, and the file captured directly from the command line interface output.
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ A command line interface session is started in config mode and the configuration is entered line-by-line while checking responses for error codes.
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Startup
Running
Siemens hiX56xx DSLAM 431
Siemens Devices
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Siemens hiX56xx DSLAM
◆ As of system version R1.5, the configuration that is output from a show running-config or show startup-config cannot be pushed back to the device without significant editing, due to the following:
• Commands that enter a subconfiguration editor, but do not exit from the subsection appropriately.
• Commands that exit too many times from a subsection, ending configuration mode entirely, and thereby causing subsequent commands to fail.
– Too many exit commands example:
ip dhcp option82 policy drop
!
!End of DHCP daemon's configuration
!
! --- eqm - BEGIN ------------------
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix432
Siemens Devices
configure terminal
rack alarm-severity-profile 1
...
card alarm-severity-profile 17 1
exit <<< Exit Config Mode
! --- eqm - END---------------------
!
no debug red-mgr
sw-keepalive
...
!
End <<< Exit Config Mode, too many times.
• Use of EXEC mode syntax in configuration mode commands. For example, our test device produces the following (abridged) config:
– EXEC mode command example:
!configdb_version 1
hostname SG1-ARC146-VIL
terminal length 0 <<<This is an EXEC mode command.
login accounting-mode none
bridge
! start> --- tracelevel submodules swchd ---
debug switch vlan 3
Siemens hiX56xx DSLAM 433
Siemens Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix434
52
SourceFire Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Sourcefire 3D Sensor ................................................................................................... 436
SourceFire Devices 435
SourceFire Devices
Sourcefire 3D Sensor
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture
◆ Configuration Deploy
◆ Credential Management
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ Using SSH:
• /etc/sf/model.conf file must contain the model information as a string 3D Sensor 2100.
• Serial number must be available through hostid command.
Intrusion Prevention Sensor
3D Sensor 2100
http://www.sourcefire.com/
Yes
Syslog
Text, Binary
SSH
SSH
SSH, SCP
SSH
SSH
4.8.0 -12
SCP
SCP
SSH
Ping, View Description, View Model, View OS Version, View Serial No., Up Time, View Interfaces, View Routes, View ARP Table, View Memory Information, View File Sysytem Information, View hardware Inventory
Capabilities, Control, Description, Status, Subsystem, Latency
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix436
SourceFire Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Text config
• Configuration parameters stored by the device
◆ Binary config
• Configuration parameters stored by the device
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Text
• Configuration data can be pushed using the config editor or the command editor.
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Sourcefire 3D Sensor 437
SourceFire Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Sourcefire 3D Sensor 2100
◆ SNMP is not supported.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix438
53
Starent Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Starent PDSN ............................................................................................................... 440
Starent Devices 439
Starent Devices
Starent PDSN
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs)
◆ Device Access (Cut Thru, Device Commands, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ SNMP SysDescr
◆ Model from SysObjectIDs: 1.3.6.1.4.1.8164.*
◆ OS, Filesystem and Memory from CLI
◆ Interface table from MIB-2
◆ Enterprise MIB at .1.3.6.1.4.1.8164
Starent Packet Data Serving Node
ST16
https://support.starentnetworks.com/
No
Syslog, SNMP Traps
Text (running config only)
Quick Commands, Configlet Termlet, Command, Config
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
CLI, SNMP
SNMP
In-Band
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Ping, View Routes, Traceroute, View_interfaces
Slot/Card Inventory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix440
Starent Devices
Configuration capture
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ For SSH/TFTP and Telnet/TFTP:
• save configuration tftp://[serverIP]/[filename] -noconfirm verbose
◆ For SSH and Telnet:
• save configuration /flash/[filename] -noconfirm verbose
• show file url /flash/[filename]
Configuration deploy
The following are the commands, or processes that are used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ For all protocols:
• The device is brought to a shell prompt in admin mode.
• The configuration is entered line-by-line with checks for invalid input.
• By default, the running config is copied to the startup file after a successful push to running. This step can, optionally, be skipped when the push job is scheduled.
Multi-config filesFollowing are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
running
Attributed data Support
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
Starent PDSN 441
Starent Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Starent PDSN
◆ The copyToStart post-operation does the following:
• Sends the show boot initial-config command to find the startup config file.
• Copies the current contents of the above file to [startfile].bak.1.
• Sends the command copy configuration [startfile] -noconfirm.
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix442
54
Symbol Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Symbol WS-2000.......................................................................................................... 444
Symbol Devices 443
Symbol Devices
Symbol WS-2000
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Change Notification (Events)
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Switch Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Wireless Switch WS-2000
Symbol WS-2000
http://www.symbol.com/
Yes
Traps
Single Text
Termlet Merge, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only, SNMP/TFTP
Command Line, Menu Driver, Web Based
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
1.5.0, 1.5.1, 2.0.0, 2.0.1, 2.0.2
Terminal, SNMP, Non-SNMP
Terminal, SNMP
SNMP, Terminal, Non-SNMP
Telnet/TFTP, Telnet/FTP
View NAT, Test Credentials, Device Uptime, Interface Summary, Setup Diagnostic, View Diagnostic Setup, Setup NAT, View NAT Setup
For SNMP: Hardware Inventory, Memory, Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, OS VersionFor Non-SNMP: Interfaces, Serial Number, Model, OS Version
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix444
Symbol Devices
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ System Description
• Symbol WS2000 HW=E SW=0.0-035R MIB=08c12
◆ System Object ID
• SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.388.11.1.1
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Server IP Host (a.b.c.d)
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.388.11.2.2.6.1.0
◆ TFTP Operation
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.388.11.2.2.4.1.0
– unspecified;– ftpSrvToSwitch;– ftpSwitchToSrv;– tftpSrvToSwitch;– tftpSwitchToSrv;
◆ Filename
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.388.11.2.2.4.3.0
◆ Start the transfer
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.388.11.2.2.4.4.0
◆ Operation count
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.388.11.2.2.4.5.0
◆ Operation result string
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.388.11.2.2.4.6.0
◆ Operation success string
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.388.11.2.2.4.7.0
Symbol WS-2000 445
Symbol Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Most of the sub-menus are located within the system sub-menu which is entered as follows:
• Admin>system
• Admin(system)>
◆ A configuration file can be transferred to the device using FTP or TFTP. This is available in the config sub-menu as follows:
• Admin>system
• Admin(system)>config
• Admin(system.config)>import ftp: import config from ftp server
• Admin(system.config)>import tftp: import config from tftp server
Operating System Management notes
The Symbol Device Driver supports OS upgrade and downgrade using telnet and SSH login protocols and FTP/TFTP file transfer mechanisms.
The Symbol firmware releases 1.5.0, 1.5.1, 2.0.0, and 2.1.0 have all been qualified and tested with the upgrade/downgrade process. One issue was found when completing an upgrade or downgrade between the 2.0.0 and 2.1.0 releases using the SSH protocol.
The Symbol device 2.0.0 and 2.1.0 firmware returns different fingerprints for the RSA key. Therefore, after the upgrade/downgrade, attempts to login using SSH will fail, due to the key exchange.
From the application, the per/downgrade will show Failed, based on failure to login following the device reboot, due to SSH host key verification. Suggestions for managing this issue are as follows.
◆ If possible at your site, using telnet for the OS upgrade/downgrade between 2.0.0 and 2.1.0 allows the process to proceed normally and return status of the state of the device.
◆ If using SSH for OS upgrade, check the error status looking for a successful upload, followed by an SSH failure to connect. This is the failure signature indicating the RSA key mismatch between firmware releases.
◆ In either case, you need to update the SSH host key database on the HP device server to regain access to the device.
• For Linux and Solaris Servers: The SSH key database is located in the ~root/.ssh/sshhostkeys file. Edit the sshhostkeys file, and remove the entry associated with the Symbol device based on IP address.
• For Windows Servers: The host key database is maintained in the Registry, in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Voyence\Control\SshHostKeys folder. Using the regedit utility, remove the entry associated with the Symbol device based on IP address.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix446
Symbol Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Symbol WS-2000 447
Symbol Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix448
55
Tasman Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Tasman Router ............................................................................................................. 450
Tasman Devices 449
Tasman Devices
Tasman Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Operating System Management
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (auto discovery, identify, appear in product)
◆ Configuration Capture (revision config, rollback, basic diagramming)
◆ Configuration Deploy (Push Configs, Configlets)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, TERMlets, etc.)
◆ Configuration Change Notification (SNMP Trap and Syslog Processing)
◆ Operating System Management (Upgrade OS)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ System Object ID
• 1.3.6.1.4.1.3174.1
◆ SysDecr
• Contains Tasman
Tasman Router
1004E, 1001, 1002, 1002E, 1200, 1200C, 1200E, 1200EC, 1250, 1400, 1400E, 1450 4100, 4102 6300
www.tasman.com
Yes
Single Text
Quick Commands, Termlet Merge, Privilege Mode Termlet, User Mode Termlet, Command, Configlet, Config
SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP, SSH Only, Telnet Only
Command Line
Terminal, SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
Terminal
Terminal
Telnet/TFTP, Terminal
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Resync, diffRunStart
For SNMP: Memory, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix450
Tasman Devices
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device data
The following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Tasman Family of Devices
◆ Tasman uses the concept of account levels. Currently, devices get Auto Discovered with low level accounts, but can not successfully complete a Pull. To Pull devices, you must ensure the devices are setup with Level 1 accounts.
Tasman TIOS
◆ Tasman TIOS does not allow changing the Admin Name using SSH. You must use TELNET.
running
startup
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information Yes
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Tasman Router 451
Tasman Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix452
56
Telco Devices
This chapter contains the following topics:
◆ Telco Switch.................................................................................................................. 454◆ Telco T-Metro ............................................................................................................... 457
Telco Devices 453
Telco Devices
Telco Switch
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Hardware Information
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• OID contains either 1.3.6.1.4.1.738.1.5.100.1.1.10 or 1.3.6.1.4.1.738.1.5.100.1.1.17
◆ Serial number successfully retrieved
• OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.738.1.5.100.1.3.1.0
Switch
T5CL3-24G 256M, T-Marc-250, T-Marc-254
http://www.telco.com
No
Single Text
Config, Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band
T5CL3-24G 256M: BinOS 6.5.5, T-Marc-250: BinOS 6.6.3.4, T-Marc-254: BinOS 6.6.3.4
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
View Interfaces, View Routes, Ping, Traceroute
Serial number, OS version, Interfaces
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix454
Telco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet, SSH:
• show running-config
• show startup-config
◆ Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP:
• copy running-config upload-to serverIpAddress remoteFilename
• copy startup-config upload-to serverIpAddress remoteFilename
Configuration DeployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Telnet, SSH:
• Commands are issued to the command line interface.
• Results are scanned for errors.
• Full configuration pushes are not supported with these protocols.
◆ Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP:
• copy running-config download-from serverIpAddress remoteFilename
• copy startup-config download-from serverIpAddress remoteFilename
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
Telco Switch 455
Telco Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Telco Switch
◆ No volatile or non-volatile storage information is available using SNMP, for this device class.
◆ Either Telnet/TFTP or SSH/TFTP must be enabled to push configurations. Commands issued to the CLI do not merge with the running configuration.
◆ The Configuration Editor in VoyenceControl does not analyze the content for the type of line termination. To insert blank lines in banner pages, at least one space-character must be present.
◆ Account and privilege password management is present but unverified.
◆ SNMP credential rolls require non-blank credentials.
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix456
Telco Devices
Telco T-Metro
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Features available◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Capture (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band, SNMP)
Discovery/identify methodsThe following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• OIS contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.738.1.5.100.1.1.16
◆ Serial number successfully retrieved
• OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.738.1.5.100.1.3.1.0
Switch
T-Metro 256M
http://www.telco.com
No
Single Text
Config, Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
7.0.R2
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
SSH, Telnet, SSH/TFTP, Telnet/TFTP
Terminal
Serial number, OS version, Interfaces
Telco T-Metro 457
Telco Devices
Configuration capture
Following are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ Telnet, SSH:
• show running-config
• show startup-config
◆ Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP:
• copy running-config tftp://serverIpAddress/remotePathname
• copy startup-config tftp://serverIpAddress/remotePathname
Configuration deployFollowing are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ Telnet, SSH:
• Commands are issued to the command line interface.
• Results are scanned for errors.
• Full configuration pushes are not supported with these protocols.
◆ Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP:
• copy tftp://serverIpAddress/remotePathname running-config
• copy tftp://serverIpAddress/remotePathname startup-config
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
running
startup
Attributed data Support
ARP Table No
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Device Identity Yes
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix458
Telco Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Telco T-Metro Switch
◆ No volatile or non-volatile storage information is available using SNMP, for this device class.
◆ Either Telnet/TFTP or SSH/TFTP must be enabled to push configurations. Commands issued to the CLI do not merge with the running configuration.
◆ The Configuration Editor in VoyenceControl does not analyze the content for the type of line termination. To insert blank lines in banner pages, at least one space-character must be present.
◆ Account and privilege password management is present but unverified.
◆ SNMP credential rolls require non-blank credentials.
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory No
OSPF Routing Configuration No
Hardware Information No
Static Routes No
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Attributed data Support
Telco T-Metro 459
Telco Devices
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix460
57
Vanguard Devices
This chapter contains the following topic:
◆ Vanguard Router ......................................................................................................... 462
Vanguard Devices 461
Vanguard Devices
Vanguard Router
Device Type
Specific Model(s)
Documentation/Information
Enabled By Default
Configuration Files
Configuration Content
Configuration Protocols
User Interface
Discovery/Identify Methods
Password Management
Operating System
Configuration Capture
Configuration Deploy
Cut-Through Access
Quick Commands
Features available
◆ Discover/Identify (Auto Discovery, Identify, Appear in Product)
◆ Configuration Management (Revision Config, Basic Diagramming)
◆ Device Access (Cut-Through, Termlets)
◆ Credential Management (In-Band, SNMP)
Discovery/identify methods
The following items are used to provide information about your device (Host Name, Type, Vendor, Model, Operating System, and Serial Number).
◆ sysObjectID
• Contains 1.3.6.1.4.1.449.2.1.3410
Configuration captureFollowing are the commands or processes used to "pull" a configuration from your device.
◆ tftp getscript remoteFilename serverIpAddress
Router
3410
www.vanguardnetworks.com/ support/documentation/ user_manuals/
No
Single Text
Config, Configlet, Termlet Merge, Termlet Privilege Mode
Telnet, SSH, Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Command-Line Interface
SNMP
In-Band, SNMP
V7.1.R00A_@Seven_3400
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Telnet/TFTP, SSH/TFTP
Terminal
Memory, Interfaces, Serial number, OS version, Inventory
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix462
Vanguard Devices
Configuration deploy
Following are the commands or processes used to "push" a configuration to your device.
◆ tftp setscript remoteFilename serverIpAddress
Multi-config files
Following are the files used when storing and revisioning multiple configuration files for multi-config support.
Multi-config files Push/pull Pull only
Device dataThe following data represents device data per device class.
Attributed data Support
running
ARP Table Yes
Access Control Lists No
CAM Table No
File System Information No
Identity Yes
Interfaces Yes
Keys No
Memory Yes
Access Control Lists Match Counts No
OSPF Settings No
Physical Hardware Yes
Routes Yes
System Properties Yes
VLAN Trunk Protocol No
VLANs No
Vanguard Router 463
Vanguard Devices
Known issues
The following information details existing device issues that have been discovered within other releases. In most cases, a resolution is included to address the issue.
Vanguard Router
◆ Only one session can be logged into the device at a time.
◆ SNMP community string changes require a reboot per credential to take effect.
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix464
Revised: January 29, 2010 12:00 pmVC_DSS_IX.fm(Publication Template Lg Book v4.3)
EMC CONFIDENTIALDRAFT
Index
Numerics3COM Devices 333Com Netbuilder II Router 343Com Switch 5500 36
AACME Devices 41ACME NetNet SBC 42Adtran Devices 47, 55Adtran Netvanta 48, 56Adtran Netvanta Switch 51Adva FSP150CC 56Airespace Devices 59, 93Airespace Switch 60, 94Alcatel Devices 63Alcatel OmniCore 68Alcatel Omnistack 71Alcatel Omniswitch 75Alcatel Service Router and Ethernet Service Switch 81Alvarion Breeze AP 86Alvarion Devices 85Aruba Devices 89Aruba Wireless Switch 90AudioCodes MediaPack 94
BBlueCoat Devices 99BlueCoat SG 100Brocade 7500 104Brocade Devices 103Brocade McData 107
CCheckpoint Devices 109Checkpoint Firewall-1 110Ciena Devices 115Ciena Router 116Cisco Aironet AP Package 131Cisco Aironet AP VXWorks 120Cisco Aironet Bridge Package 135Cisco Application Control Engine 138Cisco BPX 141
Cisco CatOS Switch Package 145Cisco Content Appliance 152Cisco Content Services Switch 156Cisco Devices 119Cisco Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) 178Cisco IOS Switch Package 167Cisco IOS XR 174Cisco Lightstream Package 181Cisco MDS 194Cisco MGX 189Cisco Nexus 184Cisco PIX Firewall 122Cisco Router 159Cisco VPN 3000 128Cisco Wireless LAN Controller 200Citrix Devices 203Citrix Netscaler LoadBalancer 204Configuring FTP Transfer Service 32
DDevice Drivers 28D-Link Devices 207D-Link xStack 208
EEdgewater EdgeMarc Router 212Enabling Inactive Device Classes 30Enterasys Smartswitch Router 216Ericsson ECN Switch 222Ericsson MSED 225Extreme 230ExtremeWare XOS 233
FF5 Load Balancer Rev 3 238F5 Load Balancer Rev 4 242F5 Load Balancer Rev 9 245Force10 C-Series Router 252Force10 E-Series Router 255Foundry EdgeIron 262, 266, 274Foundry Package 269
Index 465
DRAFT Revised: January 29, 2010 12:00 pm VC_DSS_IX.fm
Index
EMC CONFIDENTIAL
HHP ProCurve Switch 280
IIntroduction 25
JJuniper ERX (E Series) 296Juniper Router Package 300Juniper Switch (EX Series) 304
LLaurel ST Router 314Lucent Access Point 318
MMarconi ASX 322McAfee IntruShield 326Motorola BSR Router 334MRV LX Terminal Server 340
NNetCache 344Netopia R7000 Series 348Netscreen Firewall 352Nokia IP 356Nortel 4500 Switch 385Nortel Alteon 362, 390Nortel Alteon 2400 365Nortel Baystack 370Nortel BoSS Switch 372Nortel Contivity 375Nortel Multi-Service Switch 377Nortel Passport 380Nortel Passport 8600 382Nortel Router 367
OOverture NG 393
PPacketeer PacketShaper 402Paradyne 9100 406, 410
RRadware WSD Load Balancer 414Riverbed Steelhead 418Riverstone Router 424
SSiemens 5940 428, 430Siemens Devices 427SM801P Managed Switch 330SmartAX 286, 292Sourcefire 436
Starent 440Starent Devices 439Starent PDSN 436, 440Symbol Devices 443Symbol WS-2000 444
TTasman Devices 449Tasman Route 450Tasman Router 450Telco Devices 453Telco Switch 454Telco T-Metro 457
VVanguard Devices 461Vanguard Router 462Viewing Installed Device Driver Packages 31
EMC VoyenceControl Device Services Support Version 12.0.0 Hotfix 6 Support Matrix466